JP2014128522A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably controlling drive means for operating a movable accessory.SOLUTION: As a memory for acquiring a current position of a first accessory 87, only one current position memory 223q is provided. In the meantime, according to operation of the first accessory 87 determined based on an operation mode of the first accessory 87, a reference of the current position of the first accessory 87 acquired by the current position memory 223q is changed. An origin reference flag 223i can clear the reference of the current position of the first accessory 87, thus surely controlling the operation of the first accessory 87.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, there are some gaming machines such as pachinko machines that provide a movable accessory in a game area and perform various effects while operating the movable accessory.

JP 2012-85862 A

  When the movable accessory is operated, driving means such as a solenoid and a motor are provided for the movable accessory, and the driving of the driving means is controlled. There is a demand for more efficient control of the driving means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably control drive means for operating a movable accessory.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a determination unit that makes a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display of identification information on the display unit based on a determination result by the determination unit. And a dynamic display executing means for executing the game, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player Based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the movable display provided in the game area, the driving means for operating the movable combination, and the dynamic display execution means , A determining means for determining an operation mode of the movable accessory, a first detecting means for detecting that the movable accessory is present at the first position, and the movable accessory being present at the second position. Second detection to detect A step, a position storage means for storing the position of the movable accessory with the first position or the second position as a reference point, the operation mode determined by the determination means, and the position storage means Based on the stored position of the movable accessory, the drive control means for controlling the drive means to operate the movable accessory, and the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage means, Reference point specifying means for specifying whether the first position is used as a reference point or the second position as a reference point according to the contents of the operation mode determined by the determining means, and the reference point specifying When the reference point specified by the means is the first position, the position of the movable accessory is calculated using the first position as a reference point based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means. However, the reference point specifying means When the reference point is the second position, based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means, the position of the movable accessory is calculated using the second position as a reference point, When the calculation means to be stored in the position storage means and the reference point specified by the reference point specification means are the first position, the movable object is moved to the first position by the first detection means. When the presence is detected, the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage means is initialized to the first position, and the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is the second position. In the case of the position, when the second detecting means detects that the movable accessory is present at the second position, the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage means is set to the first position. And position initialization means for initializing to position 2 Yeah.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the determination unit makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the dynamic display executing unit moves the identification information to the display unit based on the determination result. Display is performed. Then, in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, a movable combination is provided in the game area, and the operation mode of the movable combination is determined by the determination unit based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit. Here, it is detected by the first detection means that the movable combination is present at the first position, and it is detected by the second detection means that the movable combination is present at the second position. The position storage means stores the position of the movable accessory with the first position or the second position as a reference point. And based on the operation | movement aspect determined by the determination means and the position of the movable accessory memorize | stored in the position memory | storage means, a drive means is controlled by a drive control means, and a movable accessory operates.

  The contents of the dynamic mode in which the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage means is determined by the determination means as to whether the first position is the reference point or the second position is the reference point. In accordance with the reference point specifying means, it is specified. When the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is the first position, the position of the movable accessory is calculated based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means with the first position as the reference point. When the reference point calculated by the reference point specifying unit is set to the second position, the position of the movable accessory is determined using the second position as the reference point based on the control of the driving unit by the drive control unit. Is calculated by the calculation means and stored in the position storage means. Further, when the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is set to the first position, the position storage means when the first detecting means detects that the movable accessory is present at the first position. When the position of the movable accessory stored in is initialized to the first position by the position initializing means and the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is set to the second position, the second detecting means When it is detected that the movable combination is present at the second position, the position of the movable combination stored in the position storage unit is initialized to the second position by the position initialization unit. As a result, when there are a plurality of detection means for detecting the position of the movable accessory, that is, the first detection means and the second detection means, there is only one position storage means for storing the position of the movable accessory. Even in this case, the reference point of the movable accessory position to be stored in the position storage means is specified in accordance with the contents of the operation mode determined by the determination means, and the position storage means is based on the specified reference point. The position of the movable accessory to be stored in is calculated, and the position is initialized. Therefore, when there are a plurality of detection means for detecting the position of the movable accessory, that is, the first detection means and the second detection means, and there is only one position storage means for storing the position of the movable accessory. Even so, there is an effect that the movement of the movable accessory can be controlled while accurately grasping the position of the movable accessory.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the 1st accessory, (b) is the figure which showed schematic structure of the origin detection sensor. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen and effective line setting of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in a main controller, (b) showed typically the various data stored in ROM in a main controller. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters of a main controller, various reservation ball storage areas, and various reservation ball execution areas. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot random number table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table, (c) is the variation pattern table for jackpots FIG. 6D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and FIG. 9E is a diagram of a variation (probability) variation pattern table. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in ROM in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the model which showed typically an example of the accessory drive data table prescription | regulation table. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the sound lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation. It is the figure which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the confirmation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of accessory editing / driving process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 43, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment.

  1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 (a) is provided in the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13. FIG. 4 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the first accessory 87 that is the movable accessory, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 2 shows a state where the first accessory 87 is lowered so as to cover a part of the upper side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated. Further, the frame button 22 is also used for a one-shot notification chance effect using a first accessory 87 described later. The single announcement chance production will be described later.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and an entrance to a first entrance 64 or a second entrance 640 (to be described later) Various effects such as a change effect and a reach effect that are performed along with the start / start prize are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a “town stage” with a town motif, a “sea stage” with a sea motif, a “mountain stage” with a mountain motif, etc. are prepared as stages. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the changing effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation.

  In addition, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having built-in light emitting means such as LED (Light Emitting Device). In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown).

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. However, when the stop switch 51b is pressed, the ball is stopped from firing during the pressing operation. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning opening or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back so as to flow down on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) of the game area while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 is disposed in the upper right portion of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by a main control device 110 (to be described later) that performs main control of the game, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. .

  The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in a normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state, and the symbols corresponding to the probable big hit. Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to having entered into the 1st entrance 64 and the 2nd entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  As will be described in detail later, during probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed. A longer time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared with a case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to sphere. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time are not changed. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal probability.

  On the left side of the game area as viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 2), there is provided a general winning opening 63 through which ten balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area.

  In the variable display device unit 80, the third symbol is synchronized with the variation display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and the LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the sphere of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a first accessory which is a movable accessory for a notice effect.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 6) to be described later, for example, left, middle and right The three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these three symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and is an illustration of an actual display screen. FIG. 5 schematically shows the display screen area division setting and the effective line setting together.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is “big hit”, the variation effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is the third symbol display device. It is performed at 81, and is configured so that a jackpot is generated after the variation effect is finished. When shifting to a high-probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, a variation effect is performed in which main symbols (also referred to as “high-probability symbol” and “probability variation symbol”) to which odd numbers are added are arranged. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the jackpot, a variation effect is performed in which the main symbols (also referred to as “low probability symbols” and “normal symbols”) to which even numbers are added are arranged.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three areas. One is a variable display area Dm, one is an effect display area Db, and the other is a hold display area Ds.

  The variation display area Dm is an area where a variation effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed is displayed. The variable display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order. In the variable display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 stages are displayed in the variable display area Dm.

  Here, the middle part of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set as an effective line L1, and in each game (variation effect), the effective lines are in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. The third symbol is stopped and displayed on L1. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in the present embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot effect is performed.

  The effect display area Db displays characters, character information, etc. on the back side or the front side of the third symbol, and displays a notice effect while the change effect is being performed in the change display area Dm. This is an area for displaying various effect images by displaying a jackpot effect.

  Here, the notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the current fluctuating effect, so that the player can know the degree of expectation that will be a big hit according to the content of the image displayed in the notice effect It has become. In the present embodiment, as an aspect of the notice effect, the first character 87 is operated and caused to emit light, and an image that emphasizes the movement and light emission of the first character 87 is displayed in the effect display area Db. There is also an aspect of notifying the player of the expected degree of winning. The player can increase the expectation that is a big hit by viewing the notice effect executed during the change effect.

  The pachinko machine 10 is prepared from a variation effect with a short variation time to a variation effect with a long variation time, and the notice effect is configured to be executed more as the variation effect has a longer variation time. This is because if the variation time of the variation effect is long, the player may be bored until it is stopped and displayed, and the player is executed every time the announcement effect is displayed. Can have a sense of expectation for jackpots. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the player and continue playing the game.

  The holding display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Yes, it is divided into a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of balls held for the ball that has entered the first entrance 64 is displayed. In the second reserved display area Ds2, the number of reserved balls for the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 is displayed.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 87), the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the first reserved display area Ds1. In addition, even when a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 87), the number of entrances is a maximum of four times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the second hold display area Ds2.

  In the first holding display area Ds1 and the second holding display area Ds2, one holding ball number symbol (“●” symbol) is displayed for each holding ball number, and the number of the holding ball number symbols is displayed. The number of balls on hold is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1, it indicates that the number of held balls for the first entrance 64 is one, and 4 in the second reserved display area Ds2. When the number of reserved balls is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 is four.

  In addition, when the number of reserved balls ("●" symbol) is not displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2, the number of reserved balls for the corresponding entrance 64,640 is 0. It indicates that there is no reservation ball. The player can grasp the number of held balls that are held at that time from the number of held balls displayed in the held display area Ds.

  In place of the display of the number of reserved balls in the reserved display area Ds, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 are respectively included as part of the third symbol display device 81. It may be displayed in numbers. In addition, a certain area of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and another region in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. May be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 87, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, the door frame 12, or the like is provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holdings are provided, and the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 and the holding ball for the second entrance 640 are determined according to the number of on-holding lamps. It is good also as what displays a number.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The first accessory 87 is a disk-like movable accessory in a front view of the game area, and is used for a notice effect. The first accessory 87 is at the origin position as an initial position in a normal state, and is stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 when the game area is viewed from the front, so that the player cannot see it. Then, for example, when the variation effect of the third symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the first accessory 87 is attached at an arbitrary timing while the variation effect is being performed. In the vicinity of the position lowered from the center frame 86 and lowered to the maximum lowered position (maximum point position), the first accessory 87 is moved up and down in a clockwise direction (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2) in the game area. By performing the rotation operation, a notice effect (so-called one-shot notification effect) is performed in which the player can visually recognize the first action 87 that has been rotated and notice that the variation effect will be a big hit.

  An LED (not shown) is built in the vicinity of the center of rotation of the first accessory 87, and when the LED is turned on or blinking in conjunction with the rotation operation of the first accessory 87, the notice effect is more enhanced. To be emphasized. Further, in accordance with the operation of the first accessory 87, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the brightness around the first accessory 87 becomes high. Thereby, the notice effect by the 1st actor 87 is further emphasized.

  Further, in the one variation effect, before the first notification effect is performed by the first role 87, the first role 87 is moved up and down according to the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, and the one notification effect is generated. The first action 87 also provides a one-shot notification chance effect that gives a player a sense of expectation that the game will be performed.

  In this one-announcement chance effect, a screen prompting the operation of the frame button 22 during the change effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 to move down the first accessory 87. Let While the frame button 22 is not operated, the first accessory 87 rises. That is, the first accessory 87 descends as the player operates the frame button 22.

  And when it becomes off in the change production in which one notification chance production is performed, the 1st accessory 87 is a predetermined position (maximum) from the initial position (the position stored in the upper part inside center frame 86. Origin position). The first action 87 is returned to the initial position (origin position) after the predetermined time elapses and the one-shot notification chance is finished. .

  On the other hand, in the case of a big win in the fluctuating production in which one announcement chance production is performed, when the first accessory 87 reaches a predetermined position by a predetermined number of times (any one of 1 to 5) determined in advance by lottery, The first accessory 87 descends to the maximum point position and executes a single notification effect.

  Thereby, when the 1st actor 87 moves up and down, a sense of expectation that a one-shot announcement effect in which a jackpot is guaranteed can be performed can be enhanced, and an interest in the game of the player can be improved. . In addition, since the one-shot notification chance effect is performed by moving the first actor 87 up and down in accordance with the operation status of the frame button 22 by the player, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game. The game can be continued without getting the player bored.

  Although details will be described later, whether or not to perform a notice effect (such as a one-shot notice effect or a one-shot notice chance effect) using the first accessory 87 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 to be described later determines. This is because the display control device 114 determines the detailed execution mode (variation pattern) of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 including the notice effect, in other words, the display control. Whether or not to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87 is determined according to the detailed variation pattern determined by the device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when it is determined to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87, including the operation mode of the first accessory 87 determined to be used in the notice effect, that effect Is notified from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 as an accessory operation start command.

  Here, the configuration of the first accessory 87 will be described with reference to FIG. The first accessory 87 employs a rack and opinion system as a configuration for moving the first accessory 87 up and down, and includes a first accessory up-and-down motor 87a, a drive gear 87b and a driven gear as gears. 87c and a slide gear 87d. Although not shown, a first accessory rotating motor 87e (see FIG. 6) for rotating the first accessory 87 is also provided. When the first accessory rotation motor 87e is driven, the first accessory 87 rotates in the clockwise direction in the game area (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2).

  The first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is a stepping motor, and drives and rotates the drive gear 87b by a given step unit by applying a pulse signal. The driven gear 87c is meshed with the drive gear 87b and is driven to rotate by the rotational force of the drive gear 87b.

  The first slide gear 87d is formed by cutting a flat bar and meshed with the driven gear 87c. The first slide gear 87d can reciprocate in the vertical direction as the driven gear 87c rotates. . A first accessory 87 is connected to the lower end of the first slide gear 87d. Therefore, the drive gear 87a is driven and rotated in units of steps by the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, so that the slide gear 87d is moved in units of steps in the vertical direction via the driven gear 87c. The first accessory 87 can be moved up and down in the range from the origin position to the maximum point position. In the pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position, the first accessory 87 is driven by driving the first accessory up / down moving motor 87a by 100 steps in the direction in which the first accessory 87 is lowered. Reaches the maximum point position.

  The drive control of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e (see FIG. 6) controls sound output, lighting and turning off of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like. This is performed by an audio lamp control device 112 described later. The details of the drive control of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A protrusion 87f is provided at the upper end of the slide gear 87d. An origin detection sensor 88 is provided at the position of the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position. Further, a maximum point detection sensor 89 is provided at the position of the protrusion 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position.

  Here, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 88 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 88. The maximum point detection sensor 89 has the same configuration as that of the origin detection sensor 88, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  The origin detection sensor 88 includes a light emitting element attachment portion 88a to which a light emitting element (not shown) is attached, a light receiving element attachment portion 88b to which a light receiving element (not shown) is attached, and one end of the light emitting element attachment portion 88a. A light emitting element mounting portion 88b is a U-shaped sensor constituted by a connecting portion 88c that connects one end of the light receiving element 88b so that the light emitting element and the light receiving element are opposed to each other by a predetermined distance. The detection groove 88d is formed by the portion 88a, the light receiving element mounting portion 88b, and the connecting portion 88c.

  When there is no insert in the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element attaching portion 88a is received as it is by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attaching portion 88b. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element attaching portion 88a is blocked, and the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attaching portion 95b receives the light. Can not. The origin detection sensor 88 outputs an off signal when the light receiving element receives light, and outputs an on signal when no light is received, so that in the control device that has received the signal, there is any insert in the detection groove 88d. It can be determined whether or not it has been inserted.

  In the origin detection sensor 88, the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is disposed on the front side in the front view, the light receiving element mounting portion 85b is disposed on the rear surface side in the front view, and the connecting portion 88c is disposed on the left side in the front view. The projection 87f of the slide gear 87d is attached so that the light irradiated from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked by being inserted into the detection groove 88d. Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 88 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the origin detection sensor 88 outputs an ON signal, so that the control device can perform the first role. It can be determined that the object 87 has reached the origin position.

  The maximum point detection sensor 89 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 88, the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position, and the projection 87f of the slide gear 87d is inside the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 89. By being inserted, it is attached so that light irradiated from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. Therefore, when the maximum point detection sensor 89 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the control device outputs the ON signal from the maximum point detection sensor 89, It can be determined that the single accessory 87 has reached the maximum point position.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on for a predetermined time. Is. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after the second symbol variation is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the second symbol is displayed.

  When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side of the game area as viewed from the front, that is, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (right side in FIG. 2). Part of the sphere that flows down is configured to be able to pass. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed.

  After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation. If the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out. If there is, the symbol “x” is displayed as the symbol for stopping the variable display. The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the variation display of the second pattern is performed for the number of the spheres that are reserved. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37. Separately from the first symbol display device 37, a second symbol hold lamp for displaying the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the second symbol is displayed for the maximum reserved amount. The number of reserved balls may be indicated by providing four and keeping the second symbol holding lamps lit for the number of reserved balls. Further, the number of reserved balls may be displayed on a 7-segment display or may be displayed in a predetermined area of the third symbol display device 83.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In the pachinko machine 10, a sphere (so-called “left-handed” sphere) launched so that the sphere passes through the left of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the first entrance 64 is a variable display device unit. The ball is configured to enter more than the ball launched so that the ball passes the right side of 80 (the so-called “right-handed” ball).

  A second entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is disposed below the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In the pachinko machine 10, a sphere (so-called “right-handed” sphere) that is launched so that the sphere passes through the second entrance 640 to the right of the variable display device unit 80 is a variable display device unit. The ball is configured to enter more than the ball launched so that the ball passes through the left side of 80 (the so-called “left-handed” ball).

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is one of the entrances through which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are calculated. Although configured in the same way, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 is one. May be.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( In an enlarged state), and the sphere easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, although details will be described later, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Even if there is a high probability state, it is the same. However, the probability of the 15R probability variation jackpot that is most advantageous to the player as the type of jackpot that is selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball entering the second entrance 640 is the first entrance It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the ball entrance 64, and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Since the through gate 67 that triggers the lottery for the open state is arranged on the right side of the variable display device 80, the right side of the variable display device 80 is directed toward the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. If the ball is fired so that the ball passes through (right-handed) and the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the ball entering the second entrance 640 is aimed to become a 15R probability variation big hit, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80 and below the through gate 67, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). When a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, a specific winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and 15 balls are paid out as winning balls.

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  In the left corner of the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small part of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 640, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs a jackpot lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a display result in the second symbol display device 83 (a second symbol winning lottery), and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The main control device 110 transmits commands for instructing various operations to a sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 via the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. This is to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main control device 110 via a signal line connecting the main control board 110 and the sub control board.

  Here, various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203, and FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the RAM 203 has a special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special figure 2 as shown in FIG. Reserved ball counter 203e, universal reserved ball counter 203f, universal reserved ball counter 203g, universal reserved ball counter 203h, universal reserved ball storage area 203i, universal reserved ball execution area 203j, special figure type flag At least 203k.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the ROM 202 has at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a release variation pattern table 202d.

  Further, in the main control device 110, the main winning features of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery in the second symbol display device 83 are described. In order to execute processing, the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 8) for storing various counters.

  Here, referring to FIGS. 8 and 9, various counters provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110, various tables 202 a to 202 d stored in ROM 202, and various storage balls stored in RAM 203 The areas 203a, 203b, 203i and the various reserved ball execution areas 203c, 203j will be described. First, FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol A stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 21). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the counter update timing for each counter. Update.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. When the first random number counter C1 is updated once (when it is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returned to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the first random number counter C1 is updated from the newly read initial value.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Although details will be described later, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). The stored special figure 1 is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 at that time is the special figure 2 reservation number provided in the special figure reservation ball storage area 203b. Stored in one of the first to fourth areas.

  The value of the random number that is a big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit. A first per-random number stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure second reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when a ball is won (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a (the jackpot random number value), the MPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: a game state for a low probability state (a state in which the probability change is not in progress) and a high probability state (a state in which the probability change is in progress) having a higher probability of being a jackpot than the low probability state. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. By differentiating the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (big hit random value) that is a big hit in the low probability state is 3, and the big hit random value “7,307,582” is “low” in the “gaming state”. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “probability state”.

  On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state is 30, and the jackpot random numbers “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448 , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 are associated with the “high probability state” of the “gaming state” It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  In the present embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, there is a duplicate value between the jackpot random number value associated with the “low probability state” and the jackpot random number value associated with the “high probability state”. Each jackpot random value is set so that it does not become. If there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned increases. As in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, the value of the random number that is a big hit is predicted. Since it can be made difficult to be done, fraud can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203a. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball in the RAM 203 together with the value of the first hit random number counter C1. It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203b.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in () is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect or the type of stop symbol (hereinafter “stop type”) Will be the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c is a random number that is a big hit, The fluctuation pattern and the stop type are those of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds. There are “15R normal jackpot”, which is a short-time state during the number of fluctuations, and “4R probable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 4 rounds.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, and the second pitch The correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot lottery result based on the winning to the mouth 640 is a jackpot is separately defined.

  In the example of FIG. 9B, as a correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot lottery result based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, The jackpot type table for the “first entrance” is defined as follows. That is, the value “0-24” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable big hit, the value “25-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation big hit. That is, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the first entrance 64, the jackpot type becomes a 15R probability variation big win with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) with a probability of 4R.

  On the other hand, as the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the second entrance 640 is a jackpot, The jackpot type table is defined as follows. That is, the value “0-24” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variable big hit, the value “25-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit. In other words, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the second entrance 640, the type of the big win is a 15R probability variation big win with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1 / 4R (25/100) with a probability of 4R.

  In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 depends on the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball can enter at any time.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed). In addition, a through gate 67 that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 640a is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80. Normally, even if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric gate is electrically operated. While the accessory 640a is unlikely to be in the open state, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state when the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the probability change or in the short time.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. 3 stoppages: “rear out of front / rear”, where the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol, and “completely out” where no reach occurs. A production) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203a. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in any reserved area of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203b.

  One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big random number, the stop type is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the stop type at the time of departure. The

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C <b> 3, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values to be selected for the stop type are provided in the ROM 202. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” or “reach other than front / rear detachment”. If the probability is low, a table with a narrow range of random values from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected to secure the time for entering the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for determining the variation pattern, and is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 21).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 in FIG. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas.

  The MPU 201 determines variation patterns such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach by using the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern tables 202bc and 203d (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation mode is determined.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a big hit variation pattern table 202c used at the time of big hit and a deviation variation pattern table 202d used at the time of loss as the fluctuation pattern tables. Further, as the variation pattern table 202d for detachment, the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment depending on whether the gaming state is a low probability state during normal except for the shortage, or during the shortage or certain change. A use (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is prepared.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is obtained from the big hit fluctuation pattern table 202c. It is determined.

  Further, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state except for a short time, A stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first per-random number counter C1 is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1, and the gaming state is in a short time or a certain probability variation. At this time, the stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1 is a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202. It is determined from the 2.

  FIG. 9C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big hit variation pattern table 202 c stored in the ROM 202. The variation patterns selected in the case of the jackpot include various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. Among these variation patterns, the variation pattern (variation time) depends on the value of the variation type counter CS1. ) Is selected.

  Here, the various types of the reach reach are the change patterns with a short change time of 30 seconds, and the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after the short reach (the so-called bitter stop pattern is aligned). . The various types of super reach are fluctuation patterns of 60 seconds and longer than normal reach types, and the first symbol (or third symbol) after a relatively long reach (for example, reach that develops from long reach or normal reach). ). Special reach types are fluctuation patterns that have a longer variation time of 90 seconds than the super reach types, and the reach that takes the longest time (for example, the reach that develops after the super reach or the destination from the normal reach is the super reach) This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after different special reach.

  Note that “various reach” means that there are a lot of different contents in each reach. For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach or the like that is displayed suddenly. In addition, there are a plurality of reach with different contents such as an addition of a notice effect before the start of change and an addition of an effect that becomes a big hit by re-change.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c, the gaming state is normal, short-running, or short, like the variation pattern table 202d for losing (see FIGS. 9 (d) and (e)). The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different depending on the probability change.

  Specifically, the association between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the game state is normal is 0 to 50 for various types of normal reach, 51 to 179 for various types of super reach, and 180 for various types of special reach. ~ 198. On the other hand, the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the gaming state is short or probable is 0 to 149 for various types of normal reach and 150 to 198 for various types of super reach.

  In the big hit variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 9C, when the game state is normal, various types of super reach and special reach having a long variation time are easily selected as variation patterns. On the other hand, when the gaming state is short-running or probabilistic, various types of normal reach having a short variation time are easily selected as variation patterns.

  During normal times, since the probability of winning a big hit is low, various types of super reach and special reach that have a long variation time are selected as the variation pattern, so that the variation production by various types of super reach and special reach is performed. , It can greatly expand the player's expectation that will be a big hit. On the other hand, during a short time or during a certain change, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, and a start winning is likely to occur at the second entrance 640. Therefore, if you select many variation patterns with a long variation time during a short time or certain change, it may take time to start the next variation production, giving the player a wait state, and may cause discomfort to the player There is. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a short time or a certain change, it is configured so that various types of normal reach having a shorter variation time than in the normal state can be easily selected, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 9C, when the game state is in a short time or a certain variation, various special reach types are not selected. Although details will be described later, the special reach types are not selected in the case of losing. In other words, when a fluctuating effect is performed by special reach, it means 100% jackpot. Here, during the probability change, it is a gaming state that will surely be a big win for the player, so if the variable effect is performed by special reach during the probability change, the variable effect ends earlier than the joy that became a big hit As a result, there is a strong dissatisfaction with the desire to shift to a special gaming state (a jackpot state). In the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuating effect due to the special reach is not performed during the time reduction or the probability change, so that such dissatisfaction of the player can be avoided.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the game state is the same in the short-time and the probability change, and the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS 1 is the same. The association between the pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c may be defined so that various special reach types are selected as the variation pattern during a short time. During the time shortage, it is not necessarily guaranteed that it will be a big hit, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that will be a big hit by performing a variable effect by special reach.

  In addition, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change production may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after).

  FIG. 9D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202 d 1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9 (d), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is used only for complete disconnection, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common that is referenced when a reach other than is determined, and the stop type at the time of a break, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached. One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the range, the first is obtained when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state except for a short time. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the hit random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area It is determined from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d1.

  Dedicated to complete detachment includes a short lapse where the change ends in a short time (7 seconds) and the reach is not established, and a long lapse that is longer than the short deviation (10 seconds) but the reach is not established, Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for short deviation and 99 to 198 for long deviation. In addition, for reach, there are various types of normal reach where the reach is established but the fluctuation time is as short as 30 seconds, and various types of super reach where the fluctuation time is 60 seconds longer than the normal reach, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 The normal reach ranges from 0 to 149 and the super reach ranges from 150 to 198.

  FIG. 9E is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9 (e), the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of separation, similar to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. It is referred to when the reach is determined to be other than the full-removal reach and short-reach and long-reach, and the reach other than the front-rear and front-rear reach, and the common reach with various types of normal reach and various types of super-reach. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the same reserved area when the gaming state is in a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is extracted from the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. It is determined.

  Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to reach is 0 to 190 for various types of normal reach, and 191 to 198 for various types of super reach.

  The off-set (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in a short time or during the probability change, so that the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, and the start winning prize at the second entrance 640 is obtained. Is likely to occur. Therefore, if there is a lot of extraordinary time when the time is short or probable, it will take time to start the next fluctuation display, giving the player a wait state, and making the player uncomfortable There is sex. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of a probable change, it is configured so that a short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  Also, in the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 that are referred to in the case of an outage, various types of special reach that can be selected as a variation pattern in the case of a big hit are not selected. As a result, when a fluctuating effect is performed by special reach, it is a 100% jackpot. Even in the case of jackpot, the special reach is selected as the variation pattern only when the gaming state is normal, and the probability of selection is also low at 10/199. Therefore, the special reach can be made to feel to the player as a special variation effect, and a great pleasure can be given to the player when the variation effect by the special reach is performed.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). Further, the selection of the detachment type is configured to be divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. However, even when the gaming state is normal, there are a plurality of holding balls. In the case of (for example, 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the change display may be terminated early, so that it may be selected with reference to the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Further, in the variation pattern tables for outliers shown in FIG. 9 (d) and FIG. 9 (e), when short out and long out are simply out, and the out is selected, refer to other tables. Alternatively, it may be configured to select a short deviation and a long deviation with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters will be continued. The second per-random number counter C4 is a counter used for the lottery of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83. For example, the second random number counter C4 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example. It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when it is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returns to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and provided in the RAM 203. It is stored in any one of the first-fourth reserved-map areas in the reserved-ball storage area 203i.

  In the second random number counter C4, there are 149 random number values that the game state is normal, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, if the gaming state is normal, it is determined to be a win, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a stop symbol (first symbol). 2), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. In addition, the number of random number values that can be won when the gaming state is short or probable is 250, and the range is “1-250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1-250”, it is determined that the game state is in a short time or a certain change, and the second symbol display device 83 stops. As a symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time longer than the normal time.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during probability change and shorter time than in normal time. Further, as described above, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also shorter than normal, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times (enlarged state) is increased. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Although it is the same even in a high probability state, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second slot 640 is the first slot It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  In addition, the ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left-handed player) so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 than in the case where the ball is hit (rightward). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed).

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  Now, in the RAM 203, a special figure 1 holding ball storage comprising four holding areas (special figure 1 holding first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored with respect to the ball entering the first ball inlet 63 is shown. An area 203a is provided. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored with respect to the entrance to the second entrance 64. Although not shown, the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b also has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas), similar to the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. .

  Each reserved area provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a includes a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer by entering the first entrance 64. First per random number counter storage area 203a1, first per type counter storage area 203a2, variation pattern selection counter storage area 203a3, variation type counter storage area 203a4 for storing the values of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, respectively. have. Although not shown, each reserved area provided in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has a first random number obtained from the counter buffer by entering the second entrance 640. Storage areas for storing the values of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are provided for each counter.

  In the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At this time, if there is no reservation in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and all of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas are vacant areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 reserved first area. Stores the value. If there is only one hold in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the value of each counter is stored only in the special figure 1 hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the special figure 1 hold second area. Store.

  When there are two holds in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 holding first and second areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 holding third area. Stores a value. When there are three holds in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 holding first to third areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 holding fourth area. Stores a value. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning to the first entrance 64, the special figure 1 hold first area, the special figure 1 hold second It is possible to store in the order of area, special figure 1 reserved third area, special figure 1 reserved fourth area.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640, the stop Each value of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. Which of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the number, it is determined by the same method as in the case of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning to the second entrance 640, the special figure 2 hold first area, the special figure 2 hold second The area, the special figure 2 reserved third area, and the special figure 2 reserved fourth area can be stored in this order.

  In addition, when the start winning to the 1st entrance 64 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the 1st to 4th reserved areas in FIG. 1, the value of each counter at that time is detected. Is discarded without being suspended. Similarly, if the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the special figure 2 holding first to fourth areas, The value is discarded without being held. In other words, in this embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured such that the value of each counter can be held up to four start winnings.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a special figure holding ball execution area 203c. When there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b at the start timing of the variation effect, the first per random number counter stored in the special figure 2 hold first area of the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b. The values of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and stop type counter CS1 are respectively the first per random number counter storage area 203c1 provided in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the first hit type It is moved to the counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  If there is no reservation in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and there is a reservation in the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a has a special figure 1 reservation first area. The first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CS1 stored therein are respectively set to the first per-random number counter provided in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. It is moved to the storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  Then, the value of each counter stored in the first per random number counter storage area 203c1, the first per type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the above, a jackpot lottery, a variation pattern of variation effect, and a type of stop symbol are determined.

  In the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type. The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Thus, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter stored in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b regardless of whether there is a hold in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a. Value is transferred to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and based on the value of each counter stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, determination of the big win lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol Is done. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the start winning at the second entrance 640 is prioritized over the start winning at the first entrance 64, and a lottery effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. It is configured as follows.

  In addition, the value of each counter of the special figure 1 reservation 1st area of the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, or the value of each counter of the special figure 2 reservation ball 1st area of the special figure 2 reservation ball storage area 203b, After moving to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 holding second area or the special figure 2 holding second area is changed to a free special figure 1 holding first area or special figure. 2 is shifted to the reserved first area. Then, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area is shifted to the free special figure 1 reserved second area or the special figure 2 reserved second area. The value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area or the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is shifted to the free special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area.

  As a result, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the holding by the second entrance 640 is reduced by one, and the special figure 2 holding ball is saved. One area of the storage area 203b is released. Further, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the holding by the first entrance 64 is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 holding ball is stored. One area 203a is opened.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that each data in the reserved area (second to fourth) is shifted to an area having a smaller area number regardless of the presence or absence of data in each reserved area. Data may be shifted only for a reserved area in which (variable counter values) are stored (held). For example, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a before the data shift is 2, and the special figure 1 reserved first area and the special figure 1 reserved second area. If only the data is stored, the data in the special figure 1 holding first area is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and then the data in the special figure 1 holding second area is transferred to the special figure 1 holding first area. The shift process may be terminated by shifting to one area. As a result, the data shift process is not performed for the reserved area where the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the special figure 1 reserved third to fourth areas), so the number of data shifts is reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a universal reserved ball storage area 203i comprising four reserved areas (normal map reserved first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored for the passage of a ball in the through gate 67. ing. Each holding area has a second per-random number counter storage area 203i1 for storing the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer by the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67.

  The ordinary reserved ball storage area 203i stores a second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the passing timing of the ball in the through gate 67. At this time, when there is no reservation in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i and all of the general-purpose reserved first to fourth areas are vacant areas, the second random number counter C2 is stored in the general-purpose first reserved area. The value of is stored. If there is only one hold in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203a, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general-purpose reserved first area, the second random number in the general-purpose reserved second area Stores the value of the counter C4. If there are two holds in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reserved first to second areas, the second figure is stored in the general-purpose reserved third area. Stores the value of the hit random number counter C4. If there are three holds in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203a and the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reserved first to third areas, the second reserved area in the general-purpose reserved fourth area Stores the value of the hit random number counter C4.

  As a result, in the order in which the passage of the sphere is detected in the through gate 67, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer at the passage timing of the sphere is changed to the ordinary figure holding first area and the ordinary figure holding second. It is possible to store in the order of the area, the general map hold third area, and the general map hold fourth area. If the passing of a sphere is detected in the through gate 67 when the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in all of the first-to-fourth reserved areas, the second hit at that time is detected. The value of the random number counter C4 is discarded without being held.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with an ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j. At the start timing of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), if there is a hold in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, it is stored in the general-purpose hold first area of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i. Each value of the second per-random number counter C4 is moved to the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 provided in the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j. Then, based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 of the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203j, a winning lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed.

  Note that when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 in the first reserved area of the reserved figure in the ordinary figure holding ball storage area 203i is moved to the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j, it is then stored in the second reserved area in the reserved figure. In addition, the value of the second random number counter C4 is shifted to the vacant ordinary reservation first area. Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose hold third area is shifted to the free general-purpose hold second area, and the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose hold fourth area The value is shifted to the third area where the figure is reserved.

  As a result, when the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is started based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 reserved in the universal symbol holding ball storage area 203i, only one ordinary symbol is retained. One area of the ordinary reserved ball storage area 203i is released.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when data shift processing is performed between each reserved area (general reserved first to fourth areas) of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, whether or not there is data in each reserved area. However, each data in the reserved area (secondary area to fourth area) is shifted to an area with a smaller area number. However, as in the case of the special figure, the data (values of various counters) ) May be shifted only for the reserved area in which is stored (held). For example, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i before the data shift is 2, and only in the general-purpose reserved first area and the general-purpose reserved second area. If the data is stored, the data of the general map hold first area is shifted to the general map hold ball execution area 203j, and then the data of the general map hold second area is shifted to the general map hold first area. The shift process may be terminated. As a result, the data shift process is not performed in the reserved area where the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the customary reserved third to fourth areas), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the RAM 203 is continued. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are first entrances detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 15) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. 64 or on the second entrance 640 (start winning), the number of held balls (standby) of the variation effect (variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81) performed in the first symbol display device 37 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times each. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S1613 in FIG. 20). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the changing effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that each counter value is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the first entrance 64. When stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a special figure 1 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. .

  Further, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that each counter value is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. When stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a special figure 2 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 2 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a winning prize is detected and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. .

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the special figure 1 reserved ball number command and the special figure 2 reserved ball number command to hold the ball with a variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 held in the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the number and the value of the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 itself. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect without accessing the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10A, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2). (See the reserved ball number counter 223b). In addition, each time a start winning is detected, a reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the number of held balls of the fluctuating effect managed in the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  It should be noted that the number of reserved balls in the changing effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 managed in the voice lamp control device 113 (see Fig. 1 reserved ball number counter 223a), and the second entrance 640. The number of reserved balls (figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) associated with the start winning of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is based on the variation pattern command. And updated at the timing of setting the variation effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the timing of starting the variation effect). That is, if the starting variation effect is accompanied by a start winning at the first entrance 64, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the starting winning at the first entrance 64 is reduced by one and starting variation. If the effect is associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 is reduced by one.

  The main controller 110 determines whether the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command in the variation pattern command transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64, Information indicating whether the start entry to the second entrance 640 is included is included. In the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information included in the variation pattern command, whether the variation effect to be started is accompanied by the start winning at the first entrance 64, or the start to the second entrance 640 Based on the result of the determination, the number of reserved balls in the changing production accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 and the change accompanying the starting winning to the second entrance 640 are determined. A process of reducing one of the number of reserved balls for production by 1 is performed.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the hold after the change every time the number of reserved balls in the fluctuating effect (the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a) accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 changes. A display special figure 1 reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified by the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, in the first hold display area Ds1, the number of variable displays (the number of held balls) held by the start winning to the first entrance 64 is shown to the player.

  Also, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the hold after the change every time the number of reserved balls in the fluctuating effect (the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640 changes. A display special figure 2 reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified by the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, in the second hold display area Ds2, the number of variable displays (the number of held balls) held by the start winning to the second entrance 640 is shown to the player.

  The special symbol type flag 203k indicates whether the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol), which is a special symbol, is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance. It is a flag indicating whether it is executed in accordance with the start winning to 640. When the special figure type flag 203k is off, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is executed with the start winning to the first entrance 64, and the special symbol type When the flag 203k is on, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is executed in accordance with the start winning at the second entrance 640.

  The special figure type flag 203k is set to off or on at the initial stage of setting the start of the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Specifically, when the execution timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0, and the start to the second entrance 640 is started. If the values of the various counters acquired with winning are held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the various counters stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (see S1304 to S1307 in FIG. 17).

  In addition, when the execution timing of the change effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0, whereas the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is If the value of various counters that are greater than 0 and acquired with the start winning at the first entrance 64 are held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, The values of various counters stored in the special figure 1 holding first area are shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (see S1304 and S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 17). ).

  In the MPU 201, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is performed by the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of execution of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), as a jackpot type table (see FIG. 9B) used for determining the jackpot type. Based on the figure type flag 203k, either “first entrance” or “second entrance” is set. Specifically, when the special figure type flag 203k is off, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big win is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64. Therefore, a jackpot type table for “first entrance” is set. On the other hand, when the special figure type flag 203k is on, the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed in accordance with the start winning at the second entrance 640. , The jackpot type table for “second entrance” is set.

  As described above, the jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot with the winning at the first entrance 64 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) with a probability of 4R. In addition, the jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot with winning the second entrance 640 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). The probability is 15R normal jackpot, and the probability of 1/4 (= 25/100) is 4R probability variable jackpot. In other words, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case.

  Here, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 changes according to the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the 1st entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory which exists in the 2nd entrance 640, and is in the state where a sphere can always enter.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed).

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, and flags illustrated in FIG. 7A, a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and various flags. And a work area (work area) in which values such as counters and I / O are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 21), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, The driving of the accessory 87 is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, a first accessory rotation motor 87e, and an origin. A detection sensor 88, a maximum point detection sensor 89, and the like are connected to each other.

  The sound lamp control device 113 transmits to the third symbol display device 81 a command related to a variation effect such as a variation pattern command and a stop type command received from the main control device 110. The display control device 114 determines a detailed execution mode (variation pattern) of the variation effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and uses the determined detailed variation pattern to determine the third variation pattern. A variation effect is executed by the symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. Further, while the one-shot notification chance effect is performed, the first accessory 87 is moved up and down according to the operation status of the frame button 22 by the player.

  When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display type command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Although details will be described later, the display control device 114 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by a display type command. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display type command received from the display control device 114, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, it drives the first accessory 87 in accordance with the accessory operation start command. The accessory operation start command is a command transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113, and includes information on an operation mode indicating how to operate the first accessory 87.

  In the display control device 114, detailed execution modes (variation patterns) of the variation effects including the notice effect are based on the variation pattern commands, stop type commands, and the like received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. decide. At this time, according to the determined detailed variation pattern, it is determined whether or not a notice effect using the first accessory 87 is to be performed, and its operation mode is determined. Based on the determination, the display control device 114 generates an accessory operation start command including information related to the operation mode of the first accessory 87 at the timing of starting the operation of the first accessory 87, and the sound lamp control device It transmits to 113.

  The sound lamp control device 113 drives the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, which is a stepping motor, according to the operation mode included in the accessory operation start command, and operates the first accessory 87 in the vertical direction. At this time, when the ON signal is input from the origin detection sensor 88, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the first accessory 87 has reached the origin position (initial position), and the sound lamp control device 113 manages the sound lamp control device 113. The position of the first working item 87 is corrected to the origin position. Further, when the ON signal is input from the maximum point detection sensor 89, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the first accessory 87 has reached the maximum point position (maximum lowered position), and the sound lamp control device 113. Is corrected to the maximum point position. As a result, the position of the first accessory 87 assumed by the audio lamp controller 113 due to mechanical slipping, etc., even though the audio lamp controller 113 has driven the first accessory up / down motor 87a. Even if a deviation occurs in the actual position of the first accessory 87, the deviation can be corrected as appropriate. Therefore, it can suppress that the movement of the up-and-down direction of the 1st actor 87 shifts greatly.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 drives the first accessory rotating motor 87e while the first accessory 87 is in the vicinity of the maximum point position, and the first accessory 87 is rotated clockwise in front view of the game area (see FIG. 2 in the direction of arrow A). As a result, a notice effect (so-called one-shot notice effect) is performed in which the player visually recognizes the first action 87 that has been rotated, and predicts that the variation effect will be a big hit.

  Here, the details of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 222. The ROM 222 has an accessory driving data table storage area 222a and an accessory driving data table definition table storage area 222b.

  The accessory drive data table storage area 222a is a storage area for storing a plurality of accessory drive data tables that define a drive pattern for driving the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a. The accessory driving data table is a table that defines the timing for driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, and the direction and amount of movement of the first accessory 87 in association with the timing. As a direction in which the first accessory 87 is moved, a forward direction (a direction in which the first accessory 87 is lowered) or a reverse direction (a direction in which the first accessory 87 is raised) is defined. As the movement amount of the first accessory 87, the number of steps for driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a which is a stepping motor is defined.

  In this accessory driving data table storage area 222a, the operation modes that the first accessory 87 can take are disassembled for each element, and elements having the same driving pattern in different operation modes are regarded as one element. The accessory driving data table that defines the corresponding driving pattern is stored as a first pattern 222a1, a second pattern 222a2, a third pattern 222a3,.

  The accessory driving data table definition table storage area 222b is an area for storing an accessory driving data table definition table. The accessory driving data table stipulation table is an accessory required for realizing the operation mode of each operation mode of the first accessory 87 instructed by the accessory operation start command transmitted from the display control device 114. The drive data table is a table that defines the necessary order.

  Here, with reference to FIG.10 (b), the accessory drive data table prescription | regulation table is demonstrated. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the accessory driving data table definition table.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the accessory driving data table definition table corresponds to each operation mode for all operation modes of the first accessory 87 instructed by the accessory operation start command. In addition, the accessory driving data table to be used is defined in the order of use.

  For example, in association with the operation mode “A mode” of the first accessory 87, the “first pattern” is defined first, and the “fourth pattern” is defined second as the accessory driving data table to be used. Note that “End” information is defined third. This means that there is no accessory driving data table to be used after the third.

  In association with the operation mode “B mode” of the first accessory 87, as the accessory driving data table to be used, the first “first pattern”, the second “second pattern”, and the third “ “Third pattern” and fourth “End” information are defined. Corresponding to the operation mode “C mode” of the first accessory 87, as the accessory driving data table to be used, the first “fifth pattern”, the second “first pattern”, the third “second” “Pattern”, “Third pattern”,... Are defined fourth.

  When the “A mode” is indicated as the operation mode of the first accessory by the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114, the first pattern 222a1 is used first as the accessory driving data table, Second, the second pattern 222a2 is used. When “B mode” is indicated by the accessory operation start command, as the accessory driving data table, the first pattern 222a1 is used first, the second pattern 222a2 is used second, the third is third. The pattern 222a3 is used. When the “C mode” is indicated by the accessory operation start command, the fifth pattern (not shown) is used first as the accessory driving data table, and the first pattern 222a1 is used second. The second pattern 222a2 is used third, the third pattern 222a3 is used fourth, and thereafter, the accessory driving data table specified in the accessory driving data table specifying table is displayed in the specified order. use.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the operation modes that the first accessory 87 can take are disassembled for each element, and elements having the same drive pattern in different operation modes correspond to each element as one element. The accessory driving data table that defines the driving pattern is stored in the accessory driving data table storage area 222a. Then, the operation mode of the first accessory 87 instructed by the accessory operation start command transmitted from the display control device 114 by the accessory driving data table definition table stored in the accessory driving data table definition table storage area 222a2. On the other hand, the accessory driving data table necessary for realizing the operation mode is specified, and the accessory driving data table is used in the prescribed order.

  Various operation modes of the first accessory 87 are prepared, but if each element is disassembled, there are many elements that have the same drive pattern in different operation modes. Therefore, when an accessory driving data table is prepared for each operation mode of the first accessory 87, a lot of information is duplicated between the accessory driving data tables, and the accessory driving data table is stored. For this reason, there is a possibility that the storage capacity necessary for this will be increased. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, one accessory driving data table is prepared for elements having the same driving pattern in different operation modes. As in the case where a driving data table is prepared, it is possible to suppress an increase in information that overlaps between the accessory driving data tables. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity necessary for storing the accessory driving data table from becoming unnecessarily large.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, as the accessory driving control data for operating the first accessory 87, the driving pattern of the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a and the driving pattern of the first accessory rotating motor 87e are used. Both were defined and stored in the ROM 222. Thereby, in the conventional pachinko machine, at the stage of designing the pachinko machine 10, the designer designs both the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the drive pattern of the first accessory rotation motor 87e. This had to be a design burden. Moreover, since the accessory drive control data including the respective drive patterns must be stored in the ROM 222, there is a problem that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 must be pressed or the storage capacity of the ROM 222 must be increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, only the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is defined as the accessory drive control data of the first accessory 87 stored in the ROM 222. In the sound lamp control device 110, while the first accessory 87 is in a predetermined range near the maximum point position, the first accessory rotation motor 87e is driven to rotate the first accessory 87. Thereby, the designer of the pachinko machine 10 has only to design the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, so that the design burden can be reduced. In addition, since only the driving pattern of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is defined and stored in the ROM 222 as the accessory driving control data, an increase in the storage capacity necessary for the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  Next, the details of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a first accessory action valid flag 223c, a first accessory initialization flag 223d, a forward movement amount memory 223e, and a backward movement amount. Memory 223f, origin reference current position memory 223g, maximum point reference current position memory 223h, origin reference flag 223i, first accessory undetected counter 223j, first accessory abnormality flag 223k, accessory driving data table buffer 223l, accessory It has at least a driving pointer 223m, a single notification chance flag 223n, a single notification chance frequency memory 223o, and a single notification flag 223p.

  The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is similar to the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 in accordance with the start winning to the first entrance 64, and the first symbol display device 37 (and third The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effects held in the main control device 110, which are the variable effects performed in the symbol display device 81).

  The special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is similar to the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, and the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol) in accordance with the start winning to the second entrance 640. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effects held in the main control device 110, which are the variable effects performed in the symbol display device 81).

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls that have won the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 based on the command transmitted from the main controller 110, respectively. The number of held balls is managed by the ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect by the start winning to the first entrance 64, and adds the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the addition of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is received. The later value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance slot 64 reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a (S2007 in FIG. 30). reference).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e in the main control device 110 by adding the number of reserved balls of the variation effect by the start winning to the second entrance 640. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after addition of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 is included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2010 in FIG. 30).

  On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted in the main control device 110. When the variation effect mode in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is set along with the reception, the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or to the second entrance 640. One value is subtracted from either one of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to whether the start winning prize is involved (see S2108 and S2110 in FIG. 31). Whether or not the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the start winning at the second entrance 640 is indicated in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Is included, and a determination is made based on the information.

  In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110, the values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, or receives the variation pattern command. Accordingly, at the timing when the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is updated, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a after the storage or update is to be notified to the display control device 114. Then, the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S2008 in FIG. 30 and S2109 in FIG. 31).

  In response to the reception of the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b or receives the variation pattern command. Accordingly, at the timing of updating the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, the display control device 114 is notified of the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage or update. Then, the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S2011 in FIG. 30 and S2111 in FIG. 31).

  When the display controller 114 receives the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp controller 113 is obtained. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. When the display controller 114 receives the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls for the minute is displayed in the reserved display area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved display areas Ds1 and Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the same as that of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The first accessory operation valid flag 223c is a flag indicating that the first accessory 87 operates effectively. The first combination operation valid flag 223c indicates that the first combination 87 operates effectively when it is on, and indicates that the first combination 87 does not operate effectively when it is off. The sound lamp control device 113 drives the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e only when the first accessory operation valid flag 223c is on. When the first accessory action valid flag 223c is off, the accessory action start command received from the display control device 114 is invalidated, and the action of the first accessory 87 based on the accessory action start command is not executed. To do.

  The voice lamp control device 113 temporarily turns off the first accessory operation valid flag 223c in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810 in FIG. 22) of the start-up process (FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. Thereafter, initialization is performed to move the first accessory 87 to the initial position (origin position) temporarily stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 (S1813). At this time, when the output from the origin detection sensor 88 is turned on and it is detected that the first accessory 87 has been moved to the origin position, the first accessory operation valid flag 223c is set to on. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can operate the first accessory 87 according to the accessory operation start command received from the display controller 114 immediately after the first accessory 87 is moved to the origin position. it can.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, the end of the initialization of the first accessory 87 is judged by taking a sufficient time to move the first accessory 87 to the initial position. Therefore, even if the first accessory 87 is originally in the vicinity of the origin position and is immediately moved to the origin position in the initialization, and the first accessory 87 becomes operable, the sufficient time has elapsed. Until then, the first accessory 87 could not be operated.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 detects that the output from the origin detection sensor 88 is turned on during the initialization process and the first accessory 87 is moved to the origin position, Since the operation valid flag 223c is set to ON, the first combination 87 can be operated immediately when the first combination 87 becomes operable. Therefore, in particular, even if a momentary power failure occurs and the sound lamp control device 113 executes the start-up process (FIG. 22) and the first action 87 is initialized, the first action 87 is obtained. Is moved to the home position, and the first accessory 87 can be operated in accordance with the accessory operation start command received from the display controller 114. Therefore, the first action 87 is performed by the initialization of the first action 87 performed by an instantaneous power failure, although the first symbol 87 is operated on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a non-operational state and to suppress discomfort to the player.

  On the other hand, if the output from the origin detection sensor 88 is not turned on and it is not possible to detect that the first accessory 87 has been moved to the origin position, the first accessory 87 cannot move in the vertical direction, It is considered that the sensor 88 has failed. In this case, the first accessory operation valid flag 223c is set to OFF. Thereby, since operation | movement of the 1st accessory 87 is made non-execution, it can suppress that the 1st accessory 87 operates irrespective of the production | presentation displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 87. FIG.

  In addition, the first accessory enabling flag 223c is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 even though the first accessory 87 should be at the origin position, the origin detecting sensor 88 sets the first accessory 87 to the origin. The first feature 87 is at the maximum point position by the maximum point detection sensor 89 even though the position cannot be detected for a predetermined time or more, or the first feature 87 should be at the maximum position. Is also set to OFF when the signal cannot be detected for a predetermined time. As a result, even when the first role 87 is operating outside the control by the sound lamp control device 113, or when the origin detection sensor 88 or the maximum point detection sensor 89 is out of order, the first role 87 is obtained. Since the operation of the object 87 is not executed, it can be suppressed that the first accessory 87 operates regardless of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 87.

  The first accessory initialization flag 223d is a flag indicating that initialization of the first accessory 87 is being executed. The first action initializing flag 223d indicates that the first action 87 is being initialized when it is on, and indicates that the first action 87 is not being initialized when it is off. Show. The first accessory initialization flag 223d is used to initialize the first accessory 87 (FIG. 22) during the startup process (FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on in the sound lamp control device 113. When starting S1813), it is set to ON (S1812 in FIG. 22). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the initialization process of the first accessory 87 for moving the first accessory 87 to the origin while the first accessory initialization flag 223d is turned on. Then, the output of the origin detection sensor 88 detects that the first accessory 87 has reached the origin position during the initialization process of the first accessory 87, and validates the operation of the first accessory 87. Or by invalidating the operation of the first accessory 87 without detecting that the first accessory 87 has reached the origin position, the initialization of the first accessory 87 is performed. When finished, the first accessory initialization flag 223d is set to OFF. Thereby, initialization of the 1st accessory 87 is complete | finished.

  The forward movement amount memory 223e is a memory for setting the movement amount for moving the first accessory 87 in the downward direction (forward direction) by the number of steps for operating the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a. The voice lamp control device 113 is defined in the accessory driving data table based on the accessory driving data table set according to the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114. If it is determined that the first accessory 87 is to be operated in the forward direction in the accessory drive data table when it is time to drive the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a, the accessory drive data table The movement amount (number of steps) specified in the above is stored in the forward movement amount memory 223e.

  Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured such that, while the forward movement amount memory 223e is a value larger than 0, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is moved by one step in the direction in which the first accessory 87 moves in the forward direction. The first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to rotate. The forward movement amount memory 223e is decremented by 1 when the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to rotate by one step. When the forward movement amount memory 223e becomes 0, the driving of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is ended. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can move the first accessory 87 in the forward direction by the movement amount set in the forward movement amount memory 223e.

  The reverse direction movement amount memory 223f is a memory for setting the amount of movement for moving the first accessory 87 in the upward direction (reverse direction) by the number of steps for operating the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a. The voice lamp control device 113 is defined in the accessory driving data table based on the accessory driving data table set according to the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114. If it is determined that the first accessory 87 is to be operated in the reverse direction in the accessory drive data table when it is time to drive the first accessory up / down motor 87a, the accessory drive data table The movement amount (number of steps) specified in the above is stored in the backward movement amount memory 223f.

  Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured such that, while the reverse movement amount memory 223f is a value larger than 0, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is moved in one direction so that the first accessory 87 moves in the reverse direction. The first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to rotate. The reverse movement amount memory 223f is decremented by 1 when the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a is driven to rotate by one step. When the backward movement amount memory 223f becomes 0, the driving of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is ended. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can move the first accessory 87 in the reverse direction by the amount of movement set in the reverse direction movement amount memory 223f.

  The origin reference current position memory 223g is a memory for storing the current position of the first accessory 87 based on the origin. When the first accessory 87 is located at the origin, “0” is stored in the origin reference current position memory 223g. Then, when the first accessory 87 is located at a position where the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a is rotated by n steps in the forward direction from the origin position, “n” is stored in the origin reference current position memory 223g. The As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven by 100 steps in the direction in which the first accessory 87 is lowered. The one accessory 87 reaches the maximum point position. Therefore, when the first accessory 87 is located at the maximum point position, “100” is stored in the origin reference current position memory 223g.

  The origin reference current position memory 223g is initialized to “0” when the origin detection sensor 88 detects that the first accessory 87 has reached the origin. When the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to rotate by one step in the direction in which the first accessory 87 moves in the forward direction, 1 is added to the origin reference current position memory 223g. . When the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to rotate by one step in the direction in which the first accessory 87 moves in the opposite direction, the origin reference current position memory 223g is decremented by one.

  The maximum point reference current position memory 223h is a memory for storing the current position of the first accessory 87 based on the maximum point. When the first accessory 87 is located at the maximum point, “0” is stored in the maximum point reference current position memory 223h. When the first accessory 87 is located at a position where the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a is rotated n steps in the reverse direction from the maximum point position, “n” is stored in the maximum point reference current position memory 223h. Stored. When the first accessory 87 is located at the origin position, “100” is stored in the maximum point reference current position memory 223h.

  The maximum point reference current position memory 223h is initialized to “0” when the maximum point detection sensor 89 detects that the first accessory 87 has reached the maximum point. When the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to rotate by one step in the direction in which the first accessory 87 moves in the forward direction, 1 is subtracted from the maximum point reference current position memory 223h. . When the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to rotate by one step in the direction in which the first accessory 87 moves in the reverse direction, 1 is added to the maximum point reference current position memory 223h.

  The origin reference flag 223i is a flag indicating whether the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the current position of the first accessory 87 based on the origin or the maximum point. When the origin reference flag 223i is on, it indicates that the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the current position of the first accessory 87 based on the origin, and when the origin reference flag 223i is off, the sound lamp control device 113 is This indicates that the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point.

  The sound lamp control device 113 sets the origin reference flag 223i to ON and sets the origin reference current position memory 223g to 0 when the origin detection sensor 88 detects that the first accessory 87 has reached the origin position. Set to. While the origin reference flag 223i is on (while the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the current position of the first accessory 87 based on the origin), the sound lamp control device 113 is the first accessory up / down motor. The origin reference current position memory 223g is updated in accordance with the driving situation of the 87a, and the driving of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is performed based on the current position of the first accessory 87 indicated by the origin reference current position memory 223g. Or an abnormality related to the operation of the first accessory 87 is detected.

  In addition, when the maximum lamp detection sensor 89 detects that the first accessory 87 has reached the maximum point position, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the origin reference flag 223i to off and sets the maximum point reference flag. Set 223i to 0. While the maximum point reference flag 223i is off (while the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the current position of the first accessory 87 on the basis of the maximum point), the sound lamp control device 113 moves the first feature up and down. The maximum point reference current position memory 223h is updated in accordance with the driving state of the moving motor 87a, and the first accessory is moved up and down based on the current position of the first accessory 87 indicated by the maximum point reference current position memory 223h. The drive of the motor 87a is controlled, or an abnormality relating to the operation of the first accessory 87 is detected.

  Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in correspondence with the origin detection sensor 88, the origin reference current position memory 223g for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87 on the basis of the origin, and the maximum point detection sensor. Corresponding to 89, a maximum point reference current position memory 223h for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87 on the maximum point basis is provided.

  In a conventional pachinko machine, only one detection sensor for detecting a movable accessory is provided at the origin position or the like, and only one memory for grasping the current position of the movable accessory is provided. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, in order to grasp the position of the first accessory 87 more accurately, a detection sensor for detecting the first accessory 87 which is a movable accessory is set to a maximum with the origin position detection sensor 88. A plurality of point position detection sensors 89 are provided. Nevertheless, if the current position memory for grasping the current position of the first work 87 is simply one as in the prior art, the first work 87 is detected by each detection sensor. Sometimes, if the current position memory is initialized, the current position memory is initialized based on the detection of which detection sensor, and then the position of the first accessory 87 is grasped based on which detection sensor. May be lost.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, since the current position memory is provided corresponding to each detection sensor, when the first accessory 87 is detected by a certain detection sensor, the current position corresponding to the detection sensor. Only the memory can be initialized, and thereafter, the current position of the first accessory 87 can be managed with reference to the corresponding detection sensor in the initialized current position memory. Therefore, each current position memory can surely grasp the position of the first accessory 87 with reference to the corresponding detection sensor.

  The first feature undetected counter 223j is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, and the first feature 87 is not detected by the origin detection sensor 88 even though the first feature 87 should be at the origin position. Or a time for counting the time at which the first feature 87 is not detected by the maximum point detection sensor 89 even though the first feature 87 should be at the maximum point position.

  The first accessory undetected counter 223j is initialized to 0 when the first accessory 87 is detected by the origin detection sensor 88 or the maximum point detection inspection 89. When the origin reference flag 223i is off, the maximum point reference current position memory 223g is 100, and the first accessory 87 should be at the origin position, the origin detection sensor 88 causes the first accessory 87 to be unexposed. If it is detected, the first accessory undetected counter 223j is incremented by 1 every 1 millisecond. When the origin reference flag 223i is on, the origin reference current position memory 223g is 100, and the first accessory 87 should be at the maximum point position, the maximum point detection sensor 89 causes the first accessory 87 to be If not detected, the first accessory undetected counter 223j is incremented by 1 every 1 millisecond.

  When the value of the first feature undetected counter 223j becomes 1000, that is, the first feature 87 is detected by the origin detection sensor 88 even though the first feature 87 should be at the origin for one second. If the first combination 87 is not detected by the maximum point detection sensor 89 even though the first combination 87 should not be at the maximum point position, the first combination 87 is a voice. It can be determined that the operation is deviating from the control by the lamp control device 113 or that the origin detection sensor 88 or the maximum point detection sensor 89 is out of order. Therefore, in this case, the sound lamp control device 110 first sets “300” in the backward movement amount memory, sets the first accessory abnormality flag 223k to on, and then moves the first accessory 87 in the reverse direction. Is controlled to move by 300 steps.

  Here, the first accessory abnormality flag 223k is a flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the movement of the first accessory 87 in the vertical direction. When the abnormality is on, the abnormality occurs. Indicates that no abnormality has occurred. The first accessory abnormality flag 223k is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. Then, as described above, when the first accessory abnormality flag 223k is set to ON, the sound lamp control device 113 can detect the first accessory 87 even if an abnormality has occurred with respect to the vertical movement of the first accessory 87. While the first combination abnormality flag 223k is set to ON, control is performed to move the first combination 87 in the reverse direction by 300 steps.

  Although the origin position and the maximum point position of the first accessory 87 are separated by 100 steps, here, the origin detection sensor 88 or the maximum point detection sensor 89 is simply broken by performing the control to move by 300 steps. However, not only can the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 be performed without any problem, but the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 can be accurately caused by slipping or the like in the vertical movement of the first accessory 87. Although the movement of the direction cannot be controlled, the first accessory 87 can be moved to the origin position even if the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 is possible.

  Then, after performing control to move the first accessory 87 in the reverse direction by 300 steps, if the first accessory abnormality flag 223k is on, the first accessory operation valid flag 223c is set to off, and thereafter The operation of the first accessory 87 is not executed. Thereby, it can suppress that the 1st accessory 87 operates irrespective of the production | presentation displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 87. FIG. In addition, since the control is performed to move the first accessory 87 in the reverse direction by 300 steps, the first accessory 87 is excluded except when the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 becomes almost impossible. Can be moved to the origin position and stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86. Therefore, it can suppress that the 1st accessory 87 will be in a stop state, with the 1st accessory 87 covering the front surface of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the vertical movement of the first accessory 87, it is possible to show the player various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to continue to enjoy the game. it can.

  The accessory drive data table buffer 223l is an operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command received from the display controller 114, and an accessory drive data table showing a drive pattern for driving the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a. Is a buffer for storing.

  As described above, in the ROM 222, the operation modes that the first accessory 87 can take are disassembled for each element, and an element having the same drive pattern in different operation modes is regarded as one element, and the drive pattern corresponding to each element. Is stored in the accessory driving data table storage area 222a. In addition, for each operation mode of the first accessory 87 specified by the accessory operation start command, the accessory driving data table required to realize the operation mode is specified in the required order. The drive data table definition table is stored in the accessory storage area 222b.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command, the accessory driving data table associated with the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command and necessary for realizing the operation mode is provided. The necessary order is specified from the accessory driving data table definition table 222b. Then, the necessary accessory driving data tables are read from the accessory driving data table storage area 222a in the required order and stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l.

  At this time, the “timing information” defined for each accessory driving data table in the accessory driving data table storage area 222a is rewritten when a necessary accessory driving data table is stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l. It is done. That is, the unit is 1 millisecond, the timing at which driving of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is started based on the reception of the accessory action start command is “1”, and the timing information is the elapsed time from the start timing. To be rewritten.

  For example, when the first-use accessory driving data table defines the driving pattern of the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a for one second, the accessory driving data table is the accessory driving data table storage area. When stored in 222a, "1" to "1000" are set as the timing information. Subsequently, when the second-use accessory driving data table defines the driving pattern of the first accessory up-and-down moving motor 87a over 2 seconds, the accessory-driving data table is an accessory driving data table storage area. When stored in 222a, "1001" to "3000" are set as the timing information. Further, if the third-use accessory driving data table defines the driving pattern of the first accessory up-and-down movement motor 87a for 1.5 seconds, the accessory driving data table is stored in the accessory driving data table. When stored in the area 222a, "3001" to "4500" are set as the timing information. Then, in association with the rewritten timing information, when the first accessory 87 is driven at that timing, the direction and amount of movement of the first accessory 87 are defined.

  The sound lamp control device 113 refers to the timing information of the accessory driving data table stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l in this way in ascending order from “1” every 1 millisecond, and the referenced timing. If the direction and amount of movement of the first accessory 87 are associated with the information, the amount of movement is set in the forward direction movement amount memory 223e or the backward direction movement amount memory 223f according to the direction of movement. That is, when the moving direction is the forward direction (the direction in which the first accessory 87 is lowered), the moving amount is stored in the forward moving amount memory 223e. When the direction of movement is the reverse direction (the direction in which the first accessory 87 is raised), the movement amount is stored in the reverse direction movement amount memory 223f. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can move the first accessory 87 in the vertical direction according to the accessory driving data table.

  In addition, when storing the accessory driving data table in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l, “End” information is defined in association with the last timing information after the last accessory driving data table to be used. When the first lamp moving up / down movement motor 87a is driven based on the accessory driving data table stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l, the sound lamp control device 113 performs “ If the “End” information is associated, the accessory driving data table stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l is referred to the end, and the first accessory 87 is operated in the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command. It is determined that the movement in the up and down direction has been completed. Then, the drive control of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a based on the accessory drive data table stored in the accessory drive data table buffer 223l is ended.

  The accessory driving pointer 223m is used in the accessory driving data table when driving control of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is performed based on the accessory driving data table stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l. A pointer that defines timing information to be referred to.

  The accessory driving pointer 223m is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. While the accessory driving pointer 223m is 0, the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a is not driven without referring to the accessory driving data table buffer 223l.

  When the accessory operation start command is received from the display control device 114, 1 is set to the accessory driving pointer 223m in accordance with the setting of the accessory driving data table in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l. When the accessory driving pointer 223m is a value other than 0, the timing information indicated by the accessory driving pointer 223m is referenced every millisecond from the accessory driving data table stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l. To do.

  Then, if the direction and amount of movement of the accessory first accessory 87 are associated with the timing information, the amount of movement is determined according to the direction of movement, the forward movement amount memory 223e or the backward movement amount. After setting in the memory 223f, 1 is added to the accessory driving pointer 223m. If the timing information indicated by the accessory driving pointer 223m is not associated with the direction and amount of movement of the first accessory 87, 1 is added to the accessory driving pointer 223m as it is. Further, if the “End” information is associated with the timing information indicated by the accessory driving pointer 223m, the accessory driving pointer 223m is set to 0. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can operate the first accessory 87 in the vertical direction according to the accessory driving data table.

  Note that the accessory driving pointer 223n is also used to measure the execution time when executing a single notification chance effect or when executing a single notification effect after a single notification effect. In other words, when a one-shot notification chance effect is instructed as an operation mode by the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114, the accessory driving pointer 223m is set to 1. Then, the accessory driving pointer 223m is counted up by 1 every 1 millisecond, and when the value reaches 5000, the one-shot notification chance effect is finished. Thereby, the one-shot notification chance effect is executed for about 5 seconds.

  Also, the accessory driving pointer 223m is set to 1 when the one-shot notification effect is shifted to the one-shot notification effect. Then, the accessory driving pointer 223m is incremented by 1 every 1 millisecond, and when the value reaches 3000, the one-shot notification chance effect is finished. As a result, a one-shot notification effect is executed for about 3 seconds.

  The one notification chance flag 223n is a flag indicating that a one notification chance effect is being executed. The one notification chance flag 223n indicates that the one notification chance effect is being executed when it is on, and indicates that the one notification chance effect is not being executed when it is off.

  The single notification chance flag 223n is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. The voice lamp control device 113 sets the one notification chance flag 223n to ON when the one notification chance production effect is instructed as the operation mode by the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114. Then, a one-shot notification chance effect using the first accessory 87 is executed for about 5 seconds. At this time, the sound lamp control device 113 does not drive and control the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a using the accessory driving data table stored in the accessory driving data table storage area 222a. In accordance with the operation state of the frame button 22 by the first, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven and controlled.

  That is, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the first action 87 is lowered by 30 steps up to a position lowered by 80 steps from the origin position (hereinafter referred to as “one-shot notification chance position”). Therefore, the forward movement amount memory 223e is set. Specifically, when the distance from the current position of the first accessory 87 to the one notification chance position is 30 steps or more, 30 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e, and the first accessory 87 is Lower by 30 steps. If the distance from the current position of the first accessory 87 to the one notification chance position is less than 30 steps, a step corresponding to the distance from the current position of the first accessory 87 to the one notification chance position. The number is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e.

  While the frame button 22 is not operated after the first action 87 is lowered, 100 is set in the backward movement amount memory 223f in order to raise the first action 87. Thereby, if the frame button 22 is not pressed, the 1st actor 87 will raise toward the origin position. In other words, as the player operates the frame button 22, the first accessory 87 descends.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine that performs the effect of moving the movable accessory up and down based on the operation of the frame button 22, after the movable accessory is lowered by the operation of the frame button 22, the movable accessory is raised again. The operation of the frame button 22 has been invalidated until returning to the origin position. This causes the player to wait for the operation of the frame button 22 until the operation of the frame button 22 becomes valid next time, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the distance from the current position of the first accessory 87 to the one notification chance position is calculated, and even if the first accessory 87 is not at the origin position, the distance depends on the calculated distance. Thus, since the amount of movement for lowering the first accessory 87 can be determined, the player can operate the frame button 22 at any time to lower the first accessory 87 toward the one-shot notification chance position. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be repeatedly hit, and the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In the case of a big win in a variable production where a one-shot announcement chance production is performed, the first action is given to the accessory operation start command for a predetermined number of times (any one of 1 to 5) determined by lottery of the display control device 114. When the object 87 reaches the position of 80 steps from the origin position which is the one-shot notification chance position, the one-shot notification chance effect shifts to the one-shot notification effect. At this time, 20 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e to lower the first accessory 87 by 20 steps and move it to the maximum point position.

  The one-shot-announcement-chance memory 223o stores the first role 87 necessary for shifting to the one-shot-notification effect when the fluctuating effect for which the one-shot-notification-chance effect is performed is a one-shot notification chance position ( This is a memory for setting a predetermined number of times (any one of 1 to 5) to reach the position of 80 steps from the origin position. The predetermined number of times is determined by lottery in the display control device 114, and information on the predetermined number of times is included in the accessory action start command indicating the one notification chance production as the operation mode. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the accessory action start command, and the action mode indicated by the accessory action start command is a one-shot notification chance effect, the voice lamp control device 113 receives information of a predetermined number of times from the accessory action start command. The extracted predetermined number of times is extracted and stored in one notification chance number memory 223o.

  Thereafter, every time the first action 87 reaches the one notification chance position, the one notification chance number memory 223o is decremented by 1, and the value of the one notification chance number memory 223o after subtraction becomes zero. Furthermore, assuming that the first accessory 87 has reached the one notification chance position a predetermined number of times, 20 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e to lower the first accessory 87 to the maximum point position. In addition, a first notification flag 223p described below is set to ON, and the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven and controlled so that the operation of the first accessory 87 corresponding to one notification notification effect is performed.

  In addition, when the variation effect in which the one notification chance effect is performed is not included, in the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114, the one notification chance effect is instructed as the operation mode and the predetermined number of times is given. “6” is instructed. When “6” is stored in the one notification chance number memory 223o, the sound lamp control device 113 shifts to the one notification effect no matter how many times the first accessory 87 reaches the one notification chance position. First, about 5 seconds after starting the one-shot notification chance effect, the one-shot notification chance flag 223n is set to OFF, and the one-shot notification chance effect is ended.

  The one notification flag 223p is a flag indicating that the one notification notification effect is being executed by shifting from the one notification chance effect. The one notification flag 223p indicates that the one notification chance effect is being executed by shifting from the one notification chance effect when it is on, and the one notification chance effect is being performed when it is off. Indicates that no one-shot announcement effect is being executed or one-shot announcement effect is not executed. The single notification flag 223o is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on.

  When the one notification flag 223p is on, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the interval between the maximum point position and a position 15 steps above the maximum point position (hereinafter referred to as “one notification minimum position”). While the forward movement amount memory 223e and the backward movement amount memory 223f are alternately set so that the first accessory 87 moves up and down, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven. As a result, the first accessory 87 vibrates up and down between the maximum point position and the single notification minimum position, so that the single notification effect for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed in the variable effect is executed by this vibration. The Then, when about 3 seconds have passed since the start of the one notification effect, the one notification flag 223p is set to OFF, and the one notification effect is ended.

  The RAM 223 also stores a command received from the main control device 110, a main control command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and commands received by the display control device 114. A display control command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing until a process corresponding to the command is performed, a change start flag (not shown) indicating that a change effect should be started in the ON state, and the like Have.

  Each of the main control command storage area and the display control command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the main command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the main control command storage area is read out, and the main command is read out. The command is analyzed by the determination process, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Further, when the display command determination process (see FIG. 32) is executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the first stored display command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the display control command storage area. Then, the display command determination process analyzes the command and performs a process according to the command.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 30). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S2102 in FIG. 31).

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display type command for notifying the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display type command, thereby performing the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226. Can be combined.

  Furthermore, the display control device 114 determines whether to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87 according to the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, in the display control device 114, when it is determined to perform the notice effect using the first accessory 87, including the operation mode of the first accessory 87 determined to be used in the notice effect, This is notified from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 as an accessory operation start command. The sound lamp control device 113 drives the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87b so that the first accessory 87 operates in the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid 209, a first action vertical movement motor 87a, and a first action rotation. A 12 volt voltage for driving a motor such as the motor 87e, a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are respectively set. A necessary voltage is supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 sends a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device. 113, and the display type command for notifying the display content to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114 and the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An accessory operation start command for instructing an operation start of the one accessory 87 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  An MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, and an image controller 237 are also connected to the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

  The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table is an area in which a display data table describing the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time in an effect corresponding to the display data table is stored. The MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, reads out the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads the read-out data table. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the display data table.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113. Display data tables corresponding to the confirmed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

  The demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and received by receiving a confirmed command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variation effect. It is an effect that is displayed. For example, when the stop symbol is an outlier symbol, an effect of emphasizing the loss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either 15R probability big jackpot, 15R normal jackpot or 4R probability big jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. Production is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the final display effect.

  The restart effect is when the fixed command transmitted from the main controller 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image obtained by vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  In the display data table storage area 232a, one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect is stored. A display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variation effect, is prepared for each table according to the combination of the variation effect pattern and the stop symbol set. In addition, the display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect includes the one that displays the out symbol as a stop symbol, the one that displays the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot), and the normal jackpot (15R normal) Each of them is provided with a decisive display.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as people and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the display data table for change. This back surface type is any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of “town stage”, “sea stage”, “mountain stage”) selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Or the information specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the back image rendering content in the display data table will be described, but instead of this, the back surface type and the back surface type corresponding to which state You may make it prescribe | regulate the display status information which shows whether a back image should be displayed. The rear image is displayed with the display range, brightness, color, etc. changed with the passage of time. This display state information may be information indicating an elapsed time after the rear image in the initial state is displayed, for example. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information is displayed.

  The display state information is information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). May be. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Based on the state of the back image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started. Identify.

  Further, the display state information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table depending on the rear surface type). It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the display on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is started, and the type information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 for the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the start of display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), A unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, a unique identification number for identifying each of the third symbols is attached to each of the third symbols. For example, “0” is assigned to the main symbol “0”, “1” is assigned to the main symbol “1”, and “1” is assigned to the main symbol “2”. 2 "is attached.

  In addition, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from when the variation starts until the predetermined time elapses, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. Offset information with the symbol identification number is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the display of the variation effect performed immediately before. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. Until the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before The difference (offset information) from the identification information is described. Thereby, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  In addition, as the symbol type information, the third symbol is displayed at a high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed. It is set so that the time is displayed in a variable manner. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined at some addresses. For example, when displaying high-speed fluctuation, the display content is defined as “high-speed fluctuation display”, and when displaying a girl character image, the display content is defined as “girl character display”, and a light-emitting effect image is displayed. When it is to be displayed, the display content is defined as “light emission effect display”.

  When the establishment of the probability variation reach is displayed, the display content defines “establishment of the probability variation reach” together with the type of the main symbol for which the probability variation reach is established. When displaying the establishment of the normal reach, “normal reach establishment” is defined as the display content together with the type of the main symbol that established the normal reach. In addition, when displaying double reach, both probability variation reach and normal reach are established, so the display content first defines “establishment of probability variation reach” together with the type of main symbol that established probability variation reach. In addition, “normal reach establishment” is defined together with the type of main symbol for which normal reach is established.

  The display content defined in the display data table is used to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the display data table, in addition to the drawing contents, “actuator driving” information indicating the start of the operation of the first accessory 87 is defined at some addresses. The first accessory 87 is driven in accordance with the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table. The “actual object driving” information is defined so that the first accessory 87 is driven in accordance with the image. The “actual object driving” information is configured by an operation mode indicating the operation content of the first accessory 87.

  The display control device 114 generates an accessory operation start command including information related to the operation mode based on the “object driving” information, and transmits the command to the sound lamp control device 113.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 12). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a, stored in a display data table buffer 233a (to be described later) provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233c is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 14) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233c, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a display type command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the audio output device 226 outputs audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command.

  In addition, when the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, the accessory operation start command including information on the operation mode of the first accessory 87 to be started is generated according to the accessory driving information. And transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this accessory operation start command, the first accessory up / down motion motor 87a or the like is operated so that the first accessory 87 operates in the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command. The first accessory rotating motor 87e is driven.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Returning to FIG. The additional data table storage area 232b adds the display contents of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for one effect based on the command from the main control device 110, and additional data prepared for each effect. This is the area where the table is stored. Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. The concept of displaying and changing another effect on the one effect, changing part or all of the color tone of the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect. Is included.

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. Also, the drawing content required to change part or all of the color tone in the one production, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one production are predetermined. It is.

  Here, the details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional data table. In the additional data table, the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is defined in detail in association with the address defined in the display data table. The drawing content defines the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed on the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 13, the sprite type, the display position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency value, and the α blending information are associated with an address “0097H” defined in the display data table. , Color information and filter designation information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, this means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0001H” in FIG. 13).

  Note that, in the additional data table, for example, it is displayed in addition to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main controller 110. The display content for displaying the notice effect image may be defined.

  Further, in the additional data table, as in the display data table, in addition to the above-described drawing content, the display content of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on may be defined at some addresses. For example, when a notice effect using “fish school” is additionally displayed, “fish school” may be defined as the display content.

  Further, in the additional data table, as in the case of the display data table, in addition to the drawing contents, “actuator drive” information indicating the start of the operation of the first accessory 87 may be defined at some addresses. The first accessory 87 is driven in accordance with the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the additional data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the additional data table. “Combination driving” information may be defined so that the first combination 87 is driven in accordance with the image.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” that is the start address of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (“00FDH in the example of FIG. 13). “)” Describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the additional data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 reads the additional data table from the additional data table storage area 232b based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and stores it in the additional data table buffer 233b of the work RAM 233 described later, every time the pointer 233c is updated. From the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c is specified, and the next drawing should be performed A drawing list (see FIG. 14) to be described later is created by specifying the image contents.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 13, when the pointer 233g becomes “0097H”, the MPU 231 is specified by the address “0097H” of the additional data table to the various sprites specified by the address “0097H” of the display data table. The drawing list is created by adding the sprite of the character 1 and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is “0001H”, Null data is defined at the address “0001H” of the additional data table, so it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “ A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in “0001H”.

  When the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is “End” information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 13, even when the pointer 233c indicates an address after “00FEH”, it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. Thereby, according to the update of the pointer 233c, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table An image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. In the case where another effect image is displayed in addition to the effect image (for example, the effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be added and displayed is set in the additional data table buffer 233b. Thus, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and there are two types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, a display that prescribes an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 2) = 96 types of display data tables must be prepared. As in this pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to another effect image is used as an additional data table. By defining separately, 32 + 2 = 34 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the ROM 232 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various types of effects in the capacity prepared in the ROM 232, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effects images.

  Moreover, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a by prescribing other effect images to be additionally displayed as the additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, Even when display of other effect images to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. By simply setting in the data table buffer 233b, other effect images to be added and displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed.

  In addition, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b. While updating the pointer 233c for each time from the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and easily draw one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally is displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentations from a small number of data tables.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, a time counter 233e, and a single notification chance count memory 233f.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233c one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. A drawing list (see FIG. 14), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  When the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a display type command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the audio output device 226 outputs audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command.

  Further, when the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, the accessory operation includes information relating to the movable accessory type to be started to operate and information relating to the operation mode according to the accessory driving information. A start command is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this accessory action start command, each of the movable action objects indicated by the accessory action start command operates so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. Drives the solenoid and motor provided in the accessory.

  The additional data table buffer 233b is displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a in response to a command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to the performance. As the MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 once writes Null data indicating that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 233b. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, the MPU 231 performs an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a based on the command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. When there is an effect to be determined and added and displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Store.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233c one by one, and stores the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. In the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 14) to be described later describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 is generated for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. . As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the additional data table in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. If no additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

  The pointer 233c is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing contents are to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233c to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. In the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of one frame of image, the pointer Update processing is executed (see S1709 in FIG. 39, FIG. 42), and the value of the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 (see S1781 in FIG. 42).

  The MPU 231 updates the address indicated by the pointer 233c each time the pointer 233c is updated, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. A drawing list (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, is created by specifying the drawing contents defined in (1).

  Thereby, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. . Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  The drawing list area 233d is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 14, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. The image controller 237 is a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area designated by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value Processed, combined with other sprites according to the α blending information, color tone corrected according to the color information, and filtered according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information Above, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 draws the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c and other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on the contents of the image (for example, a reserved image that displays the number of reserved balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) ) And rearrange the detailed information for each sprite to create a drawing list.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a where the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately sets the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  The MPU 231 also displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the table is copied as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The time counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 34 (b)). ))), The time counter 233e is decremented by one each time the display setting process (S1404, see FIG. 39) is executed. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  Similar to the one notification chance number memory 223o provided in the sound lamp control device 113, the one notification chance number memory 233f is used when the variation effect in which the one notification chance effect is performed becomes a big hit. This is a memory for setting a predetermined number of times (any one of 1 to 5) that the first accessory 87 needs to reach one notification chance position (position of 80 steps from the origin position), which is necessary for shifting to (1).

  The predetermined number of times is determined by the display control device 114 when the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be started, which is determined based on the reception of the variation pattern command for display, is accompanied by a single notification chance. 1 is determined from 1 to 5 times. Then, the determined predetermined number is stored in one notification chance number memory 233f.

  The one notification chance number memory 233f is used when the one notification chance production effect is defined as the “actual object driving” information at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table for change accompanied by one notification chance. Referenced. And, when the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is a jackpot symbol, the actor action start command indicating the one notification chance effect as the operation mode and the number of times stored in the one notification chance number memory 233f as the predetermined number of times Set. In addition, when the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is out of the design, a one-shot notification chance effect is shown as the operation mode, and an accessory action start command indicating “6” is set as the predetermined number of times. The accessory operation start command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 performs a one-shot notification chance effect based on the predetermined number of times indicated by the accessory operation start command. .

  The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored, the above-described image data is stored as compressed data. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 236 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list, writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. And the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, whereby a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) defined in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a according to the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the image data. Processing is performed in accordance with the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written into one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

  The writing of the image data for one frame to the one frame buffer area and the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from one frame buffer area is then read, while the other The next one frame of image data is written into the frame buffer area.

  In this manner, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the counter buffer 202 b of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 899, 99, 99, 250) are reached, each is cleared to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance port. 64 and a start winning process associated with winning in the second entrance 640 is executed (S1105). Details of the variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 and 16, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S1107), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1108), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). The start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When there is a winning, a holding process of values indicated by various random number counters and a counting process of the number of held balls are executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S1201). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 is shown). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls NA) is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1202). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S1201: No), or even if there is a win at the first entrance 64, the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 is provided. If the number of reserved balls NA <4 is not satisfied (S1202: No), the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes), and if the number of reserved balls NA <4 of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 (S1202: Yes). 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of held balls NA) (S1203), and further, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1204).

  Next, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number NA of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 updated by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205). Transition to processing. The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21). In the voice lamp control device 113, the ball holding ball in the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the number of held balls NA of the fluctuating effect accompanying winning in the first entrance 64 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command. Manage numbers.

  In the subsequent process of S11206, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 640 (S1206). Here, a ball entering the second ball inlet 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203e (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640) It is determined whether or not the number of retained balls NB) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1207). Then, there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S1206: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 If the number of held balls NB <4 is not satisfied (S1207: No), the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), and the number of reserved balls NB <4 of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 (S1207: Yes). The value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203 (the number of held balls NB) is incremented by 1 (S1208), and further, a first per random number counter C1, a first per type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S1209).

  Next, the special figure 2 reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number NB of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 updated by the processing of S1208 is set (S1210). End the process and return to the timer interrupt process. The special figure 2 reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21). In the voice lamp control device 113, the ball holding ball in the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the number of held balls NB of the variation effect accompanying the winning in the second entrance 640 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. Manage numbers.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the fluctuation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S1301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S1302: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1303: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S1303: Yes), it means that the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) can be started. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640) is greater than 0 (S1304). As a result, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) is larger than 0 (S1304: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) ) Is subtracted by 1 (S1305), and the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1306).

  In this data shift process, the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Hold 2nd area → Special figure 2 hold 1st area, Special figure 2 hold 3rd area → Special figure 2 hold 2nd area, Special figure 2 hold 4th area → Special figure 2 hold 3rd area, etc. Data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is accompanied by the start winning to the second entrance 640. After indicating that it is to be executed, the fluctuation start process (S1308) in the first symbol display device 37B is executed, and this process is terminated. The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing of S1304, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of held balls NB) is not larger than 0, that is, the number of held balls NB is 0, and the start winning to the second entrance 640 is made. If it is determined that there is no fluctuating variation effect associated with (S1304: No), then the value of the special figure 1 retention ball number counter 203d (the retention ball of the variation effect associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64) It is determined whether or not (number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309).

  As a result, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is not larger than 0, that is, the held ball number NA is 0, and the hold associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64 is held. If it is determined that there is no changed presentation effect (S1309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, that is, whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. (S1317). In this determination process, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is determined to be greater than zero. It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

  If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1317: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S1318), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S1317: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the processing of S1318 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1701 in FIG. 21) of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next, the voice command It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control so as to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the change display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the change, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result of the processing of S1309, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of held balls NA) is larger than 0 (S1309: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (hold) The number of balls NA) is decremented by 1 (S1310), and the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S1311).

  This data shift process shifts data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 1 holding first area of the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Reservation 2nd area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 1st Area, Special Figure 1 Reservation 3rd Area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 2nd Area, Special Figure 1 Reservation 4th Area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 3rd Area, etc. Data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (S1312), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is accompanied by the start winning at the first entrance 64. After indicating that it is to be executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1308, the fluctuation start process in the first symbol display device 37 is executed, and this process is terminated.

  In this variation process, when it becomes possible to start the variation effect (S1303: Yes), first, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1304). ), When the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203e is larger than 0, that is, when the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 is held (S1304: Yes), the special figure Regardless of the value of the 1-holding ball number counter 203d, that is, whether or not the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 is held, it is held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Based on the data (each counter value), the variation effect is started. As a result, the winning prize at the second entrance 640 is configured so that the big win lottery is performed in preference to the starting prize at the first entrance 64, and the variation effect is performed based on the big win lottery. Yes.

  In the processing of S1302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has passed (S1313). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S1313: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S1314), and this process is complete | finished.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the currently lit LED is red from the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 or the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B until the variation time elapses after the variation starts. If there is, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is turned on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and turn on the blue LED. Then, a display mode is set in which the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1313: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1315). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a change start process (S1308) described later with reference to FIG.

  That is, whether or not a big hit is determined by the process of S1308 according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter Depending on the value of C2, it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot (maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a big round of 15 rounds) or a 4R probability variation jackpot (maximum number of rounds will be a high probability state after a jackpot of 4 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol will be a transition jackpot or a symbol that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability change big hit is reached after the big hit, a red LED is turned on when the 4R probability change big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue color are turned on when the 15R normal big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1315, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In this case, a confirmation command is set for confirmation (S1316), and this process is terminated. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the fluctuation start process (S1308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1308). This variation start process (S1308) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and based on the values of various counters stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. A lottery of “big hit” or “off” (big hit lottery) is performed, and an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of a variable effect performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a big hit lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c (S1401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (that is, normal and short time), “7,307,582” associated with the “low probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202a. "Is a jackpot random number value, and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (ie, probabilistic change)," 28, 58, 85 "associated with the" high probability state "in the jackpot random number table 202a. 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836 , 866, 892 "is the jackpot random value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with the jackpot random number value. Determine.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1401 that it is a big hit (S1401: Yes), in order to set the display mode at the time of the big win, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag 203k is on (S1402). ). Then, when the special figure type flag 203k is on (S1402: Yes), the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is executed with the start winning to the second entrance 640. Therefore, as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type, a jackpot type table (see FIG. 9B) for "second entrance" is set (S1403).

  On the other hand, when the special figure type flag 203k is off (S1402: No), the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is executed with the start winning to the first entrance 64. Therefore, as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type, a jackpot type table for the “first entrance” (see FIG. 9B) is set (S1404).

  Then, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. The display mode for the corresponding jackpot is set (S1405).

  In other words, the jackpot type selected by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404, that is, the 15R probability variable jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot Based on whether the maximum round number is a 4R probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a big round of 4 rounds, or a 15R normal jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a big round of 15 rounds The display mode of the display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set.

  Also, based on the transition state after the jackpot, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is the stop type Set as

  Here, when the jackpot is won with winning the first entrance 64, the jackpot type is ¼ according to the jackpot type table for the “first entrance” (see FIG. 9B). 15R probability variation jackpot with probability (= 25/100), 15R normal jackpot probability with 1/4 (= 25/100), and 4R probability variation jackpot with probability of 1/2 (= 50/100).

  On the other hand, in the case where a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the second entrance 640, the jackpot type is ½ according to the jackpot type table for “second entrance” (see FIG. 9B). 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of (= 50/100), 15R normal jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 4R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100).

  In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 depends on the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball can enter at any time.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed). In addition, a through gate 67 that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 640a is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80. Normally, even if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric gate is electrically operated. While the accessory 640a is unlikely to be in the open state, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state when the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the probability change or in the short time.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Next, a variation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1406). The determination of the variation pattern is based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether normal, short-running, or probability variation), the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 9C). Based on. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the game is not a big hit (S1401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1407). In the processing of S1407, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-clock symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear detach reach, reach other than front / rear detachment, or complete detachment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. Yes.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1408). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal, short-running, or probability variation), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern for detachment. This is performed based on the table 202d (the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1, the variation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1408, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  When the process of S1406 or the process of S1408 is completed, the variation pattern type determined in the process of S1406 or S1408 is changed to the special figure 1 (various effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64) or the special figure 2 ( A variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is set including special figure type information indicating whether or not the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 (S1409).

  Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1405 or S1407 is set (S1410). These change pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21). The

  Next, referring to FIG. 19, it is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1551), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process proceeds to S1611 even in this case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is transferred to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701).

  Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 15) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Also, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command and the special figure 2 reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 16) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Furthermore, by this external output process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed in the special pattern in the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command and the special game state at the time of the big hit, which are necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 In this case, a command necessary for displaying various screens on the third symbol display device 81 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then the special winning opening 65a is obtained when the special game state is a big hit. In accordance with the opening / closing operation (closing condition), a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704).

  Next, a normal symbol control process for controlling the display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol, for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 changes the second symbol. Display is performed. Immediately before the second symbol display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the acquired value of the second random number counter C4. Based on the result of the lottery, As a result of the change display of the two symbols, the symbol “◯” or “×” is stopped and displayed. When the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed and the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. On the other hand, when the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is removed, the electric accessory 640a is kept closed.

  In addition, in the lottery of the second symbol, different numbers are set as the random number values to be won depending on whether the gaming state is normal, short in time, or in probability change. In other words, there are 149 random number values that the game state is normal, and the value is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the game state is normal and is a win. On the other hand, there are 250 random number values that can be won when the game state is shorter or more likely, and the range is “1-250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1 to 250”, it is determined that the game state is winning when the gaming state is short-running or probable.

  In addition, the variation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to be shorter when the gaming state is shorter or more likely than when it is normal. Furthermore, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when it is determined to be the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is released for a longer time when the gaming state is shorter or more likely than when it is normal.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during probability change and shorter time than in normal time. Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also set shorter during normal change and during shorter time than during normal. Thereby, during probability change and time reduction, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the second symbol, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged state) increases. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Although it is the same even in a high probability state, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second slot 640 is the first slot It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the 1st entrance 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a which exists in the 2nd entrance 640, and is in the state where a ball can always enter.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed). In addition, a through gate 67 that triggers a lottery when the electric accessory 640a is opened is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, since the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and easily enters the second entrance 640, the through gate 67 and the second entrance The ball is fired toward the ball entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the 15R probability variable big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim for.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  After the processing of S1705, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes after S1701 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1706, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 19 has been executed, the power-off process after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 32, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1920 (see FIG. 23) is performed by an instant voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 23), it executes a power-off process in S1920. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1920 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S1920. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  On the other hand, if the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), this startup process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process at S1820, the sound lamp control is performed. The MPU 221 of the device 113 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). Transition to processing. By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1920 is executed (see S1919 in FIG. 23). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1920 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1920 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1808 is performed via the processes of S1804 to S1806. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. (S1811).

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1809 is that when the process from S1804 to S1808 is reached via the process in S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1804. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  After the processing of S1811, the first accessory initialization flag 223d is then set to ON to indicate that the initialization of the first accessory 87 is being executed, and the first accessory operation valid flag 223c Is set to OFF to indicate that the first accessory 87 is not valid (S1812). Then, 0 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e, 300 is set in the backward movement amount memory 2223f (S1813), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  By the process of S1813, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven and controlled so that the first accessory 87 is raised by 300 steps toward the origin position direction (reverse direction). Here, even if the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position, there are only 100 steps from the origin position to the maximum point position. Therefore, as in the process of S1813, the forward movement amount memory 223e and the backward movement amount memory 2223f are set so that the first accessory 87 rises by 300 steps toward the origin position direction (reverse direction). Seems useless at first glance.

  However, since the start-up process in which the initialization process of the first accessory 87 is executed is triggered by turning on the power, immediately after the power is turned on, the first action vertical movement motor 87a controls the sound lamp. There may be a case where the device 113 does not operate in accordance with the driving of the device 113 or a case where a slip or the like occurs in the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 due to loose engagement of the gears. Therefore, by setting the forward movement amount memory 223e and the backward movement amount memory 2223f so that the first accessory 87 rises by 300 steps toward the origin position direction (reverse direction), the first accessory 87 is set. 87 can be reliably moved to the origin position.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after the main process is started, or whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the process of S1901 was executed last time. (S1901) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1913 without performing the processes in S1902 to S1912.

  In S1901, whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed is determined in S1902 to S912 in relation to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S1913, the main command determination process of S1915, and the display command determination process of S1916 in a short cycle.

  By executing the main command determination process of S1915 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the display command determination process of S1916 at a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the display control device 114. Further, by executing the fluctuation display process of S1913 in a short cycle, the setting related to the fluctuation effect can be performed without delay based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received by the main command determination process.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1916 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1902). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1905, a customer waiting effect is executed (S1905). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1907). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the one-shot notification chance effect is being executed during the variation effect, the fact that the frame button 22 has been pressed to lower the first accessory 87 is stored. Keep it. As a result, in the next feature editing / driving process to be executed, in response to the frame button 22 being pressed during the one-shot notification chance effect, the first feature up / down movement motor 87a is driven to A process of lowering the object 87 is executed.

  In addition, the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current variation by pressing the frame button 22 when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, or presses the frame button 22 during reach production. Thus, it is possible to change to an effect that has a sense of expectation for the jackpot, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is finished, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e provided on the first accessory 87 are driven to operate the first accessory 87. The accessory editing / driving process is executed (S1908). Details of this accessory editing / driving process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, lamp editing processing is executed (S1909), and then sound editing / output processing is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the sound data is decoded according to the display type command from the display control device 113 so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the decoded sound is output from the sound output device 226. . When an alarm sound output is set, an alarm sound is output from the sound output device 226 by this sound editing / output process.

  After the process of S1910, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1909 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1910 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1911, a counter update process is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to S1913. In the counter update process, various counters used by the MPU 221 are updated.

  In the process of S1913, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Then, a variable display process, which is a process for setting these generated commands to be transmitted to the display control device 114, is executed. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the variable display process, a main command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1915). Details of the main command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the main command determination process, a display command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the display control device 114 is performed (S1916). Details of the display command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1916 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1917). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1917 (S1917: Yes), both the power shutdown flag and the power shutdown processing flag are turned on (S1919), and the power shutdown processing is executed (S1920). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1921), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1917 (S1917: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1918), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1918: No), the process returns to the process of S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1918: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the accessory editing / driving process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29 are flowcharts showing this accessory editing / driving process (S1908). In this accessory editing / driving process, the first accessory 87 is driven by driving the first accessory up / down moving motor 87a and the first accessory rotating motor 87e provided in the first accessory 87, as described above. This is a process for operating, and is executed every second in the main process.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in this accessory editing / driving process, it is first determined whether or not the first accessory action valid flag 223c is on (S4000). If the first accessory action valid flag 223c is not on but off (S4000: No), it is then determined whether or not the first accessory initialization flag 223d is on (S4001: Yes).

  When the first accessory operation valid flag 223c is off (S4000: No) and the first accessory initialization flag 223d is off instead of on (S4001: No), the first accessory is caused by some abnormality. Since the operation 87 is invalidated, the accessory editing / driving process is terminated. Thereby, the operation of the first accessory 87 is not executed.

  On the other hand, even if the first accessory action valid flag 223c is off (S4000: No), if the first accessory initialization flag 223d is on (S4001: Yes), the first accessory 87 is initialized. It means to execute. Therefore, an initialization process for moving the first accessory 87 to the origin position is executed in accordance with the value of the reverse movement amount memory 223f in which “300” is set in the process of S1813 of the startup process (FIG. 22). S4002 The process of S4009 is executed.

  First, in S4002, the first accessory rotating motor 87e is stopped (S4002). Next, it is determined whether or not the origin detection sensor 88 is turned on (S4003). If the origin detection sensor 88 is not turned on and is off (S4003: No), the first accessory 87 has not reached the origin position. Therefore, the value of the backward movement amount memory 223f is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the value is 0 (S4004). As a result, if the value of the backward movement amount memory 223f is not 0, the first accessory 87 is moved by one step in the opposite direction (the direction in which the first accessory 87 is raised toward the origin position). The one-function vertical movement motor 87a is driven (S4005). Then, the backward movement amount memory 223f is decremented by 1 (S4006), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  The accessory editing / motion process is executed every 1 millisecond, but if the first accessory up-and-down moving motor 87a is moved by one step every 1 millisecond, the first accessory is moved in the vertical direction. This is done quickly, and the player may not find the game interesting. Therefore, in the accessory editing / driving process of the pachinko machine 10, the interval for driving the first accessory up / down moving motor 87a to move the first accessory 87 by one step is set to an interval of 10 milliseconds. That is, once the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is not driven until 10 milliseconds have elapsed, and after 10 milliseconds have elapsed, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a has been deactivated. Can be driven. Thereby, since the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 is performed relatively slowly, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the vertical movement of the first accessory 87. Therefore, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the origin detection sensor 88 is turned on as a result of the processing of S4003 (S4003: Yes), it means that the first accessory 87 has reached the origin position, so the first accessory 87 is initialized. First, the forward movement amount memory 223e is set to 0, the backward movement amount memory 223f is set to 0, the origin reference current position memory 223g is set to 0, and the origin reference flag 223i is turned on. And the contents of the RAM 223 necessary for operating the first accessory 87 are initialized (S4008). In addition, since the 1st actor 87 exists in the origin position at the time of finishing initialization of the 1st actor 87, in order to grasp the present position of the 1st actor 87 on the basis of the origin instead of the maximum point basis, In the processing of S4008, the origin reference current position memory 223g is set to 0 after the origin reference flag 223i is set to ON.

  Then, the first accessory initialization flag 223d is set to OFF, the initialization of the first accessory 87 is terminated, the first accessory action valid flag 223c is set to ON, and the first accessory 87 is enabled. (S4009). Thereafter, the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, the end of the initialization of the first accessory 87 is judged by taking a sufficient time to move the first accessory 87 to the initial position. Therefore, even if the first accessory 87 is originally in the vicinity of the origin position and is immediately moved to the origin position in the initialization, and the first accessory 87 becomes operable, the sufficient time has elapsed. Until then, the first accessory 87 could not be operated.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 detects that the output from the origin detection sensor 88 is turned on during the initialization process and the first accessory 87 is moved to the origin position, Since the operation valid flag 223c is set to ON, the first combination 87 can be operated immediately when the first combination 87 becomes operable. Therefore, in particular, even if a momentary power failure occurs and the sound lamp control device 113 executes the start-up process (FIG. 22) and the first action 87 is initialized, the first action 87 is obtained. Is moved to the home position, and the first accessory 87 can be operated in accordance with the accessory operation start command received from the display controller 114. Therefore, the first action 87 is performed by the initialization of the first action 87 performed by an instantaneous power failure, although the first symbol 87 is operated on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a non-operational state and to suppress discomfort to the player.

  Further, as a result of the processing of S4003 and S4004, when the origin detection sensor 88 is not on (S4003: No) and the value of the reverse movement amount memory 223f is 0 (S4004: Yes), the first accessory Although the vertical movement motor 87a is driven to move the first accessory 87 in the reverse direction by 300 steps, the origin detection sensor 88 detects that the first accessory 87 has reached the origin position. This is the case.

  As described above, even if the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position, it is only 100 steps away from the origin position to the maximum point position. The origin detection sensor 88 should be turned on until the first feature 87 has reached the origin position until the first feature 87 is moved by 300 steps in the reverse direction. Therefore, in this case, it is considered that the first accessory 87 cannot move in the vertical direction, or the origin detection sensor 88 is broken.

  Therefore, in this case, an abnormality related to the operation of the first accessory 87 is output from the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 is lit or blinked, or the first symbol object is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display of the screen indicating the abnormality of 87 is informed and notified, the first accessory initialization flag 223d is set to OFF, the initialization of the first accessory 87 is finished, and the first accessory The operation valid flag 223c is set to OFF to indicate that the first accessory 87 does not operate effectively (S4007). Then, the accessory editing / driving process ends. Even if an abnormality occurs in the initialization of the first accessory 87, the operation of the first accessory 87 is completed after the initialization of the first accessory 87 by setting the first accessory operation valid flag 223c to OFF. Can be made non-executable. Therefore, it can suppress that the 1st accessory 87 operates irrespective of the production | presentation displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 87. FIG.

  As a result of the process of S4000, when the first accessory operation valid flag 223c is on (S4000: Yes), it means that the first accessory 87 operates effectively. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S4010 shown in FIG. In the processing of S4010 to S4018, based on the detection results of the origin detection sensor 88 and the maximum point detection sensor 89, the current position of the first accessory 87 is initialized, or an abnormality related to the operation of the first accessory 87 is determined. To do.

  First, in the process of S4010, it is determined whether or not the origin detection sensor 88 is on (S4010). When the origin detection sensor 88 is on (S4010: Yes), it means that the first accessory 87 is located at the origin position. Therefore, the process of S4011 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4019 shown in FIG.

  In the process of S4011, the forward movement amount memory 223e and the backward movement amount memory 223f are set to 0 in order to stop the operation of the first accessory 87. Further, 0 is set to initialize the origin reference current position memory 223g, and the origin reference flag is set to ON to indicate that the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the origin. Furthermore, the time when the first action 87 is not detected by the origin detection sensor 88 or the first action 87 should be at the maximum point position even though the first action 87 should be at the origin position. Nevertheless, the first point undetected counter 223j for counting the time when the first point 87 is not detected by the maximum point detection sensor 89 is initialized to zero. Through the processing of S4010 and S4011, the sound lamp control device 113 assumes the first one assumed by the sound lamp control device 113 due to mechanical slipping or the like, even though the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven. Even if there is a deviation between the position of the accessory 87 and the actual position of the first accessory 87, the deviation can be corrected as appropriate. Therefore, it can suppress that the movement of the up-and-down direction of the 1st actor 87 shifts greatly.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S4010 that the origin detection sensor 88 is not on but off (S4010: No), it is then determined whether or not the maximum point detection sensor 89 is on (S4012). . When the maximum point detection sensor 89 is on (S4012: Yes), it means that the first accessory 87 is located at the maximum point position. Therefore, the process of S4013 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4019 shown in FIG.

  In the process of S4013, the forward movement amount memory 223e and the backward movement amount memory 223f are set to 0 in order to stop the operation of the first accessory 87. Further, 0 is set to initialize the maximum point reference current position memory 223h, and the origin reference flag is set to OFF to indicate that the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point. Furthermore, the time when the first action 87 is not detected by the origin detection sensor 88 or the first action 87 should be at the maximum point position even though the first action 87 should be at the origin position. Nevertheless, the first point undetected counter 223j for counting the time when the first point 87 is not detected by the maximum point detection sensor 89 is initialized to zero. By the processing of S4012, S4013, the sound lamp control device 113 assumes the first one assumed by the sound lamp control device 113 due to mechanical slipping or the like, even though the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven. Even if there is a deviation between the position of the accessory 87 and the actual position of the first accessory 87, the deviation can be corrected as appropriate. Therefore, it can suppress that the movement of the up-and-down direction of the 1st actor 87 shifts greatly.

  As a result of the processing of S4012, if it is determined that the maximum point detection sensor 89 is not on but off (S4012: No), then the origin reference flag 223i is off (that is, the current position of the first accessory) It is determined whether or not the maximum point reference current position memory 223h is 100 (S4014). If the origin reference flag 223i is on (that is, the current position of the first accessory is grasped on the basis of the origin) or the maximum point reference current position memory 223h is not 100 (S4014: No). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the origin reference flag 223i is on (that is, the current position of the first accessory is grasped on the basis of the origin) and the origin reference current position memory 223g is 100 ( S4018).

  As a result, when the origin reference flag 223i is off (that is, the current position of the first accessory is grasped on the basis of the maximum point) or when the origin reference current position memory 223g is not 100 (S4018: No), the process proceeds to S4019 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4014, the origin reference flag 223i is off (that is, the current position of the first accessory is grasped on the basis of the maximum point), and the maximum point reference current position memory 223h is 100. If it is determined (S4014: Yes), the first lamp 87 is supposed to be at the origin position under the control of the sound lamp control device 113. As a result of the processing of S4018, when the origin reference flag 223i is on (that is, the current position of the first accessory is grasped based on the origin reference) and the origin reference current position memory 223g is 100. Under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the first accessory 87 is supposed to be at the maximum point position. Therefore, in these cases, the process proceeds to S4015, and it is determined whether or not the first accessory undetected counter 223j is 1000 (S4015).

  As a result, if the first accessory undetected counter 223j is not 1000 (S4015: No), 1 is added to the first accessory undetected counter 223j (S4016), and the process proceeds to S4019 shown in FIG. . On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of S4015 that the first accessory undetected counter 223j is 1000 (S4015: Yes), 1 second has elapsed since the first accessory 87 should be at the origin position. 1 second after the origin detection sensor 88 cannot detect that the first accessory 87 has reached the origin position, or the first accessory is supposed to reach the maximum point position. This means that the maximum point detection sensor 89 cannot detect that the first accessory 87 has reached the maximum point position, even though it has elapsed.

  Therefore, in this case, it can be determined that the first accessory 87 is operating out of control by the sound lamp control device 113, or that the origin detection sensor 88 or the maximum point detection sensor 89 is out of order. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 110 sets 0 in the forward movement amount memory 223e, sets 300 in the backward movement amount memory 223f, and sets the first accessory abnormality flag 223k to on (S4017). The process proceeds to S4019 shown in FIG.

  By the processing of S4017, the first accessory 87 is moved by 300 steps in the reverse direction (upward direction) toward the origin position. Although the origin position and the maximum point position of the first accessory 87 are separated by 100 steps, the origin detection sensor 88 is simply controlled by moving the first accessory 87 in the reverse direction by 300 steps. Alternatively, not only when the maximum point detection sensor 89 is broken, but the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 can be performed without any problem, the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 is caused by slipping and the like. Although the movement of the first accessory 87 in the vertical direction cannot be controlled, the first accessory 87 is moved to the origin position even when the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 is possible. be able to.

  Then, after performing the control to move the first accessory 87 in the reverse direction by 300 steps, the first accessory operation valid flag 223c is set to OFF, and thereafter the operation of the first accessory 87 is not executed. . Thereby, it can suppress that the 1st accessory 87 operates irrespective of the production | presentation displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 87. FIG. In addition, since the control is performed to move the first accessory 87 in the reverse direction by 300 steps, the first accessory 87 is excluded except when the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 becomes almost impossible. Can be moved to the origin position and stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86. Therefore, it can suppress that the 1st accessory 87 will be in a stop state, with the 1st accessory 87 covering the front surface of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the vertical movement of the first accessory 87, it is possible to show the player various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to continue to enjoy the game. it can.

  In addition, the origin reference current position memory 223g initialized by the origin detection sensor 88 becomes 100, and the first feature 87 is detected by the maximum point detection sensor 89 even though the first feature 87 should be at the maximum point position. Is not detected, it is determined that the operation of the first accessory 87 is in an abnormal state. Further, the maximum point reference current position memory 223h initialized by the maximum point detection sensor 89 becomes 100, and the first accessory 87 is detected by the origin detection sensor 88 even though the first accessory 87 should be at the origin position. Is not detected, it is determined that the operation of the first accessory 87 is in an abnormal state.

  The origin reference current position memory 223g and the maximum point reference current position memory 223h are initialized to 0 when the origin detection sensor 88 and the maximum point detection sensor 89 detect the presence of the first accessory 87, respectively. Therefore, the origin reference current position memory 223g and the maximum point reference current position memory 223h can indicate the current position of the first accessory 87 with high accuracy. Therefore, the presence of the first accessory 87 is estimated using the current position with high accuracy, and the operation of the first accessory 87 depends on the detection state of the first accessory 87 by the maximum point detection sensor 89 or the origin detection sensor 88. It can be determined with high accuracy whether or not there is an abnormal state. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the recognition rate of the abnormal state of the operation of the first accessory 87 is bad or, conversely, the operation of the first accessory 87 is determined to be in an abnormal state even though it is not in the abnormal state. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Subsequently, in the processing of S4019 to S4034 shown in FIG. 26, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven based on the movement amounts set in the forward movement amount memory 2223e and the backward movement amount memory 223f. The first accessory 87 is moved in the vertical direction, and the first accessory rotating motor 87e is driven to rotate the first accessory 87.

  First, in S4019, it is determined whether or not the forward movement amount memory 223e is 0 (S4019). If the forward movement amount memory 223e is not 0 (S4019: No), the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to move the first accessory 87 by one step in the forward direction (S4020). As a result, the first accessory 87 moves forward by one step.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the forward movement amount memory 223e (S4021), and then it is determined whether or not the origin reference flag 223i is on (S4022). If the origin reference flag 223i is on (S4022: Yes), since the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the origin, the first accessory 87 moves one step in the forward direction. Then, 1 is added to the origin reference current position memory 223g (S4023). On the other hand, if the origin reference flag 223i is off (S4022: No), since the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point, the first accessory 87 moves one step in the forward direction. Accordingly, 1 is subtracted from the maximum point reference current position memory 223h (S4024). When the process of S4023 or S4024 is executed, the process proceeds to S4034.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing in S3019 that the forward movement amount memory 223e is 0 (S4019: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the backward movement amount memory 223f is 0 (S4025). If the backward movement amount memory 223f is not 0 (S4025: No), the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to move the first accessory 87 by one step in the reverse direction (S4026). As a result, the first accessory 87 moves by one step in the reverse direction.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the backward movement amount memory 223f (S4027), and then it is determined whether or not the origin reference flag 223i is on (S4028). If the origin reference flag 223i is on (S4028: Yes), since the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped based on the origin, the first accessory 87 moves one step in the reverse direction. Then, 1 is subtracted from the origin reference current position memory 223g (S4029). On the other hand, if the origin reference flag 223i is off (S4028: No), since the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point, the first accessory 87 moves one step in the reverse direction. Accordingly, 1 is added to the maximum point reference current position memory 223h (S4030). When the process of S4029 or S4030 is executed, the process proceeds to S4034.

  In the processes of S4020 and S4026, as in the process of S4005, once the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is not driven until 10 milliseconds have elapsed. After the elapse of 10 milliseconds, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a can be driven. The accessory editing / operation process is executed every 1 millisecond. If the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a is moved by one step every 1 millisecond, the first accessory moves up and down quickly. Although there is a possibility that the player will not feel fun, but by setting the interval for driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a to move the first accessory 87 by one step, the interval is 10 milliseconds. Thus, the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 is performed relatively slowly. Therefore, the player can be made to visually recognize the vertical movement of the first accessory 87, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.

  As a result of the processing of S4025, when it is determined that the backward movement amount memory 223f is 0 (S4025: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the first accessory abnormality flag 223k is on (S4031). . As a result, if the first accessory abnormality flag 223k is off (S4031: No), the process proceeds to S4034. On the other hand, if the first accessory abnormality flag 223k is on (S4031: Yes), the first accessory 87 is operating outside the control by the sound lamp control device 113, the origin detection sensor 88 or the maximum inspection. Since the output sensor 89 is out of order, the forward movement amount memory 223e is set to 0, the backward movement amount memory 223f is set to 300, and the first accessory abnormality flag 223k is turned on by the processing of S4017. This means that the one action 87 has been moved by 300 steps in the reverse direction. Therefore, in this case, an abnormality related to the operation of the first accessory 87 is output from the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 is turned on or blinked, or the first symbol 87 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This is notified by displaying a screen that reports the abnormality (S4032). Then, the first accessory operation valid flag 223c is set to OFF (S4033), and the process proceeds to S4034.

  As a result of the processing in S4033, the first accessory action valid flag 223c is set to OFF, and thereafter, the action of the first accessory 87 is not executed. Thereby, when abnormality generate | occur | produces in operation | movement of the 1st accessory 87, it can suppress that the 1st accessory 87 operate | moves regardless of the production | presentation displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 87. FIG.

  In the process of S4034, a first accessory rotating motor drive process is executed (S4043). In this process, based on the current position of the first accessory 87, while the first accessory 87 is in a predetermined range near the maximum point position, specifically, the first accessory is 0 to 0 on the maximum point basis. When it is located during 20 steps (that is, when the first accessory 87 is located between the maximum point position and the position of 20 steps above the maximum point position), the first accessory rotation The motor 87e is driven to rotate the first accessory 87.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, only the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is defined as the accessory drive control data of the first accessory 87 stored in the ROM 222. In the sound lamp control device 110, while the first accessory 87 is in a predetermined range near the maximum point position, the first accessory rotation motor 87e is driven to rotate the first accessory 87. Thereby, the designer of the pachinko machine 10 has only to design the drive pattern of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, so that the design burden can be reduced. In addition, since only the driving pattern of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is defined and stored in the ROM 222 as the accessory driving control data, an increase in the storage capacity necessary for the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  After the processing of S4034, the process proceeds to S4035 shown in FIG. In the process of S4035, it is determined whether or not the one-notification chance flag 223n is on (S4035). The one notification chance flag 223n is set to ON when the one action notification start effect is instructed as the operation mode in the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114, and the processing of S4035 is performed. As a result, if the single notification chance flag 223n is off (S4035: No), since the single notification chance effect is not instructed, it is subsequently determined whether or not the single notification flag 223p is on (S4036). .

  As a result, if the one notification flag 223p is off (S4036: No), the process proceeds to S4037 because there is no transition to the one notification effect after the one notification chance effect. In the processing of S4037 to S4042, in order to drive the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a according to the accessory data table set in the accessory data table buffer 223l, the forward movement amount memory 223e or the backward movement amount memory 223f is entered. The amount of vertical movement of the first accessory 87 is set.

  In the process of S4037, it is determined whether or not the accessory driving pointer 223m is 0 (S4037). If the accessory driving pointer 223m is 0 (S4037: No), the accessory driving data table for moving the first accessory 87 in the vertical direction is not stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l. Therefore, the feature editing / driving process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the accessory driving pointer 223m is not 0 as a result of the processing of S4037 (S4037: No), the accessory driving data table is stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l. The timing information indicated by the accessory driving pointer 223m is referred to from the accessory driving data table stored in the data table buffer 223l. It is determined whether or not “data” is also associated (S4038).

  As a result, when the accessory driving data is associated with the timing information indicated by the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4038: Yes), the direction of moving the first accessory 87, which is the accessory driving data. Then, the forward movement amount memory 223e or the backward movement amount memory 223f is set according to the movement amount (S4039). Specifically, when the moving direction is the forward direction (the direction in which the first accessory 87 is lowered), the moving amount is stored in the forward moving amount memory 223e. When the direction of movement is the reverse direction (the direction in which the first accessory 87 is raised), the movement amount is stored in the reverse direction movement amount memory 223f. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can move the first accessory 87 in the vertical direction according to the accessory driving data table.

  After the process of S4039, 1 is added to the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4040), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4038, if the accessory driving data is not associated with the timing information indicated by the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4038: No), then it is stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l. The timing information indicated by the accessory driving pointer 223m is referred to from the acquired accessory driving data table, and it is determined whether or not the end information is associated with the timing information (S4041).

  As a result, if the end information is not associated with the timing information indicated by the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4041: No), the process proceeds to S4040, and 1 is added to the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4040). Then, the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the end information is associated with the timing information indicated by the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4041: Yes), the accessory driving data table stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l is referred to the end. , It is determined that the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 has been completed in the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command, the accessory driving pointer 223m is set to 0 (S4042), The driving process ends. By setting the accessory driving pointer 223m to 0 in the process of S4042, the reference to the accessory driving data table stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l can be ended.

  As a result of the processing of S4035, when it is determined that the one notification chance flag 223n is on (S4035: No), a one-shot notification chance effect is generated as an operation mode by the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114. Since it is instructed, the process proceeds to S4043 shown in FIG. In the processing of S4043 to S4060, control for executing a single notification chance effect is performed.

  First, in the process of S4043, it is determined whether or not it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed by the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1908 in FIG. 23) (S4043). If the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4043: Yes), the distance D from the current position of the first accessory 87 to the one-shot notification chance position (position lowered by 80 steps from the origin position) is as follows: (S4044).

D = 80-origin reference current position (1)
Here, the origin reference current position is a value stored in the origin reference current position memory 223g. While the one-shot notification chance effect is being performed, the origin reference flag 223i is on, and the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped based on the origin.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the distance D from the current position of the first accessory 87 to the one notification chance position is less than 30 steps (S4045). If the distance D is less than 30 steps (S4045: Yes), The value of the distance D is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e (S4046), and the process proceeds to S4048. On the other hand, if the distance D from the current position of the first accessory 87 to the one notification chance position is 30 steps or more, 30 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e (S4047), and the process proceeds to S4048. . In the process of S4048, 0 is set in the backward movement amount memory 223f (S4048).

  Thereby, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, if the distance from the current position of the first accessory 87 to the one notification chance position is 30 steps or more, the first accessory 87 is lowered by 30 steps. Can be made. Further, when the distance from the current position of the first combination 87 to the one notification chance position is less than 30 steps, the first combination 87 can be lowered below the one notification chance position. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, the limit is up to one notification chance position that is a position that is lowered 80 steps from the origin position (that is, the first accessory 87 is below the one notification chance position). The first accessory 87 can be lowered by a maximum of 30 steps. After the process of S4048, the process proceeds to S4051.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed as a result of the processing of S4043 (S4043: No), then the value of the forward movement amount memory 223e is 0 and the backward movement amount memory 223f is It is determined whether it is 0 (S4049). If the value of the forward movement amount memory 223e is 0 and the backward movement amount memory 223f is 0 (S4049: No), 100 is set in the backward movement amount memory 223f (S4050), and the process of S4051 Migrate to As a result, the reverse movement amount memory 223f is used to raise the first combination 87 while the frame button 22 is not operated after the first combination 87 is lowered based on the frame button 22 being pressed. Set to 100. Thereby, if the frame button 22 is not pressed, the 1st actor 87 will raise toward the origin position. In other words, as the player operates the frame button 22, the first accessory 87 descends.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine that performs the effect of moving the movable accessory up and down based on the operation of the frame button 22, after the movable accessory is lowered by the operation of the frame button 22, the movable accessory is raised again. The operation of the frame button 22 has been invalidated until returning to the origin position. This allows the player to wait for the operation of the frame button 22 until the next operation of the frame button 22 becomes valid. In the conventional pachinko machine, sound effects are output from the audio output device 226 during that time. The lamp control device 227 is turned on and blinking to make room, but there is a possibility that the interest of the player in the game may decrease.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the distance from the current position of the first accessory 87 to the one notification chance position is calculated, and even if the first accessory 87 is not at the origin position, the distance depends on the calculated distance. Thus, since the amount of movement for lowering the first accessory 87 can be determined, the player can operate the frame button 22 at any time to lower the first accessory 87 toward the one-shot notification chance position. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be repeatedly hit, and the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In the process of S4051, it is determined whether or not the value of the origin reference current position memory 223g is 223g (S4051). If the value of the origin reference current position memory 223g is not 80 (S4051: No), the process proceeds to S4057. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the origin reference current position memory 223g is 80 (S4051: Yes), the first accessory 87 has reached the position of 80 steps from the origin position, which is one notification chance position.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the single notification chance number memory 223o is 5 or less (S4052). Here, the one-shot-notification-chance number memory 223o indicates that the first actor 87 necessary for shifting to the one-shot notification effect is notified once when the variation effect in which the one-shot notification chance effect is performed becomes a big hit. This is a memory for setting a predetermined number of times (any one of 1 to 5) to reach the chance position (position of 80 steps from the origin position). The predetermined number of times is determined by lottery in the display control device 114, and the information on the predetermined number of times is included in the accessory operation start command indicating the one notification chance production as the operation mode.

  If the value of the one notification chance number memory 223o is 5 or less as a result of the processing in S4052 (S4052: Yes), the variation effect in which the one notification chance effect is performed is a big hit, so the number of one notification chance times The memory 223o is decremented by 1 (S4053), and it is determined whether or not the value of the one notification chance count memory 223o after the subtraction is 0 (S4054). As a result, if the value of the one-shot notification chance count memory 223o after subtraction is not 0 (S4054: No), the process proceeds to S4057.

  On the other hand, if the value of the one notification chance count memory 223o after subtraction is 0 (S4054: Yes), it is determined that the first accessory 87 has reached the one notification chance position a predetermined number of times and is stored in the forward movement amount memory 223e. 20 is set (S4055). Accordingly, the first accessory 87 is further lowered by 20 steps from the first notification chance position (position of 80 steps from the origin position) and moved to the maximum point position (position of 100 steps from the origin position). Can do.

  Then, the one-notification chance flag 223n is set to OFF to end the one-notification-notification chance effect, and the one-notification-notification flag 223p is set to ON to start the one-notification chance effect transition. Further, the accessory driving pointer 223m is set to 1 (S4056), and the process proceeds to S4057.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S4052 that the value of the single notification chance number memory 223o is greater than 5 (S4052: No), “6” is set in the single notification chance number memory 223o. Means that. When the variation effect in which the one-shot notification chance effect is performed is out of the range, the command action start command received from the display control device 114 indicates the one-shot notification chance effect as the operation mode, and “6” as the predetermined number of times. Is instructed. That is, “6” stored in the one-call notification chance number memory 223o is the predetermined number instructed in the accessory operation start command when the variation effect in which the one-call notification chance effect is performed is not included. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S4057 as it is.

  In the process of S4057, it is determined whether or not the accessory driving pointer 223m is 5000 (S4057). This accessory driving pointer 223m is set to 1 when one notification chance production effect is instructed as an operation mode in the accessory operation start command received from the display control device 114, and is set every 1 millisecond. It is incremented by 1 in the next process of S4058. Therefore, in the process of S4057, it is determined that about 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the one-shot notification chance effect.

  Then, as a result of the processing of S4057, when it is determined that the accessory driving pointer 223m is not 5000 and that about 5 seconds have not elapsed since the start of the one-shot notification chance effect (S4057: No), the accessory driving is performed. 1 is added to the pointer 223m (S4058), and the accessory-driven editing / output process ends.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4057, when it is determined that the accessory driving pointer 223m is 5000 and it has been about 5 seconds since the start of the one-shot notification chance effect (S4057: Yes), the backward movement amount memory 100 is set in 223f, and 0 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e (S4059). As a result, even if about 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the one-shot announcement chance effect, or even if the change effect is a big hit, the first role When the object 87 has not reached the single notification chance position (position of 80 steps from the origin position) for a predetermined number of times, and about 5 seconds have passed since the start of the single notification chance production, the single notification chance production is performed. To finish, the first accessory 87 can be moved to the origin position.

  Then, the one notification chance flag 223n is set to OFF, the accessory driving pointer 223m is set to 0 (S4060), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated. By the process of S4060, the first notification chance effect can be ended.

  Returning to FIG. 27, if it is determined that the one notification flag 223p is on as a result of the processing of S4036 (S4036: Yes), the one notification notification effect shifted from the one notification chance effect is being executed. Then, the process proceeds to S4061 shown in FIG. The processing of S4061 to S4069 is processing for setting the movement amount of the first accessory 87 in order to execute one notification effect.

  First, in S4061, it is determined whether or not the accessory driving pointer 223m is 3000 (S4061). If the accessory driving pointer 223m is not 3000 (S4061: No), then the origin reference flag 223i is turned off (ie, the maximum) It is determined whether the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on a point basis) and the value of the maximum point reference current position memory 223h is 0 (S4062).

  As a result, when the origin reference flag 223i is off and the value of the maximum point reference current position memory 223h is 0 (S4062: Yes), it can be determined that the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position. In this case, 15 is set in the backward movement amount memory 223f, and 0 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e (S4063). Accordingly, when the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position, the first accessory 87 is moved from the maximum point position to the one notification minimum position (that is, a position 15 steps above the maximum point position). Is moved. Then, 1 is added to the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4066), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the origin reference flag 223i is on or the value of the maximum point reference current position memory 223h is not 0 (S4062: No) as a result of the process of S4062, then the origin reference flag 223i is off. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the maximum point reference current position memory 223h is 15 (S4064).

  As a result, when the origin reference flag 223i is OFF and the value of the maximum point reference current position memory 223h is 15 (S4064: Yes), the first accessory 87 is moved upward by 15 steps from the maximum point position. In this case, 15 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e, and 0 is set in the backward movement amount memory 223f (S4065). Accordingly, when the first accessory 87 is at the one notification minimum position, the first accessory 87 is moved from the one notification minimum position to the maximum point position. Then, 1 is added to the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4066), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  As described above, the first accessory 87 is moved to the one notification minimum position when it reaches the maximum point position, and is moved to the one notification minimum position when it reaches the one notification minimum position. Therefore, while the one notification notification effect is being performed, the first accessory 87 moves back and forth between the one notification minimum position and the maximum point position.

  If the origin reference flag 223i is on or the value of the maximum point reference current position memory 223h is not 15 as a result of the process of S4064 (S4064: No), the process proceeds to S4066 as it is, 1 is added to the driving pointer 223m (S4066), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  By the processing of S4062 to S4066, the first accessory 87 moves up and down between the maximum point position and a position 15 steps above the maximum point position (hereinafter referred to as “one notification minimum position”). . With this up-and-down movement, it is possible to execute a one-announcement effect for notifying that the jackpot has been confirmed in the variable effect.

  As a result of the processing of S4061, if it is determined that the accessory driving pointer 223m is 3000 (S4061: Yes), it is indicated that about 3 seconds have passed since the transition from the one-shot notification chance effect to the one-shot notification effect. means. Therefore, in this case, 100 is set in the backward movement amount memory 223f, and 0 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e (S4067). As a result, the first action up / down motion motor 87a is moved so that the first action 87 moves 100 steps in the reverse direction after 3 seconds have passed since the transition from the one-shot notification chance effect to the one-notification effect effect. Driven. Therefore, in this case, the first accessory 87 can be moved to the origin position.

  Thereafter, the one notification flag 223p is set to OFF, and the one notification effect is ended (S4068). Then, the accessory driving pointer 223m is set to 0 (S4069), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  Next, the main command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main command determination process (S1915). This main command determination processing (S1915) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Then, processing corresponding to the received command is performed. Details of the main command determination process will be described below.

  In the main command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the main control command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Is determined (S2000). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2000: Yes), the variation pattern type of the variation effect to be started from the variation pattern command (normal reach various types, super reach various types, special reach various types, short deviation, long (Ex.) Is extracted (S2001), and it is further shown whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the start winning at the second entrance 640. The special figure type information is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process.

  The variation pattern type and special figure type information extracted here are stored in the RAM 223. The variation pattern type is used when setting a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type in the variation display process (see FIG. 31) described later. . Further, the special figure type information is obtained when the value of either one of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is decreased by 1 in accordance with the start of the variable effect in the fluctuation display process. To be referenced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S2000: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2003). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command (15R probability variation per unit, 4R probability variation per unit, 15R The normal jackpot, complete miss, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach) are extracted and stored in the RAM 233 (S2005). Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  By setting the variation start flag to ON, the start of the variation effect is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to start the variation effect. The stop type is a display stop for notifying the stop symbol in order to determine the stop symbol of the variation effect to be started and to display the stop symbol with the determined stop symbol in the later-described variation display process (see FIG. 31). Used when setting a type command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not a special figure 1 reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). If it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command (ie, , The number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64, which is held in the main controller 110, is extracted, and this is stored in the special figure 1 held ball counter 223a of the voice lamp controller 113. Store (S2007).

  Then, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of third stage variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the first entrance 64. The display special figure 1 reserved ball number command for setting is set (S2008), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 1 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 of the device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2009). ). If it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received (S2009: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command (ie, , The number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640, which is reserved in the main controller 110, is extracted and is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 223 b of the voice lamp controller 113. Store (S2010).

  Then, the value of the special figure 2 retained ball number counter 223b is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of the 3rd symbol variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the second entrance 640. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command for setting is set (S2011), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the second hold display area Ds2 of the device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has not been received (S2009: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2012). If no other command has been received (S2012: No), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S2012: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S2013), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the variable display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this variation display processing (S1913). This variation display processing (S1913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. Therefore, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, and the generated display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated. Is set to be transmitted to the control device 114.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are not received from the main controller 110. The fluctuation display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then the variation pattern command in the processing of S2102 of the main command determination process (see FIG. 30). The variation pattern type (various reach, super-reach, special reach, short out, long out) in the extracted variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2105. And obtained from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Next, a display variation pattern command for notifying the extracted variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated and set for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 (S2105). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the extracted stop symbol to the display control device 114 is generated, and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S2106).

  By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation effect so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol. At this time, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. In addition, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, based on the stop type indicated by the display stop type command, the display control device 114 confirms and displays the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command. The stop symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  Here, the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 defines only the variation time, but the display control device 114 provides various detailed variations prepared for the variation time. One variation pattern is selected from the patterns, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed. Further, the stop types notified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 indicate rough stop types such as 15R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, complete loss, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear outreach. The display control device 114 determines a stop symbol that matches the stop type.

  Next, in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 manages the reserved ball as it is consumed (that is, the variation effect corresponding to the reserved ball is set). In order to reduce the number of held balls, first, from the special figure type information extracted in the process of S2002, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect to be started this time is associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64, that is, special figure 1. (S2107), if it is a fluctuation according to the special figure 1 (S2107: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (S2108).

  Then, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of third stage variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the first entrance 64. The display special figure 1 reserve ball number command for setting is set (S2109), the fluctuation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 1 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 of the device 81.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2107, when it is determined that the variation effect to start this time is associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640, that is, the variation according to the special drawing 2 (S2107: No). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 202b (S2110). Then, the value of the special figure 2 retained ball number counter 223b is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of the 3rd symbol variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the second entrance 640. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command for setting is set (S2111), the variation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the second hold display area Ds2 of the device 81.

  Next, a display command determination process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the display command determination process (S1916). In the display command determination process (S1916), as described above, the command received from the display control device 114 is determined, and the process corresponding to the received command is performed. Details of the display command determination process will be described below.

  In the display command determination process, first, from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the display control device 114 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the display type command is received from the display control device 110. Is determined (S2201). If it is determined that the display type command has been received (S2201: Yes), the display content (display type) to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is extracted from the received display type command (S2202). Then, a setting for reading out the audio data corresponding to the display content from the ROM 222 is performed, the reproduction of the audio is started (S2203), and the display command determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S2201 (S2201: No), it is then determined whether or not an accessory operation start command has been received from the display control device 114 (S2204). ). If it is determined that the accessory action start command has been received (S2204: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first accessory action valid flag 223c is on (S2205).

  As a result, if the first accessory action valid flag 223c is not on but off (S2205: No), it means that an abnormality has been confirmed in the operation of the first accessory 87 and it does not operate effectively. The command for starting the accessory operation is invalidated, and the display command determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the first accessory action valid flag 223c is on (S2205: Yes), then, the action mode of the first accessory 87 indicated by the received accessory action start command is extracted (S2206). Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted operation mode is a single notification chance effect (S2207). If it is not a single notification chance effect (S2207: No), the operation mode associated with the extracted operation mode is determined. The accessory driving data table necessary for the realization and the necessary order are specified from the accessory driving data table definition table 222b, and the necessary accessory driving data table is used in the necessary order. The accessory driving data table is read from the object driving data table storage area 222a, and the accessory driving data table corresponding to the operation mode is set in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l (S2208).

  Then, the accessory driving pointer 223m is set to 1 (S2209), and the display command determination process is ended. Thus, the first accessory 87 is moved in the vertical direction according to the accessory driving data table set in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l by the accessory editing / driving process (see FIGS. 24 to 29).

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S2207 that the action mode extracted from the received accessory action start command is a one-shot notification chance effect (S2207: Yes), the one-call notification chance flag 223n is set to ON. (S2210). Then, in the one-shot notification chance effect, a predetermined number of times (1 to 5) that the first accessory 87 reaches the one-call notification chance position (position of 80 steps from the origin position) necessary for shifting to the one-shot notification effect. Is extracted from the accessory action start command, and is set in the one notification chance number memory 223o (S2211). Thereafter, the display command determination process ends. Thereby, the one-shot notification chance effect using the first accessory 87 is executed by the accessory editing / driving process (see FIGS. 24 to 29).

  As a result of the process of S2204, when it is determined that the accessory operation start command has not been received (S2204: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the display control device 114 (S2216). . If no other command has been received (S2216: No), the display command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S2216: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S2217), the display command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V-interrupt process executed in the case of The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for completing the image drawing process for one frame. To do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start is normally started.

  After the processing of S2401, interrupt permission is set (S2402). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34B, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 34B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 14) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt process, first, a command determination process (S2602) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. For example, when a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the detailed variation pattern is supported. The display data table for change is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of the change effect, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area in 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect such as the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and to produce the effect image corresponding to the aspect. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2603), the address specified by the pointer 233c is defined based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S2602). According to the drawn contents, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specifically specified.

  Further, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b, the display contents (to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on at the address indicated by the pointer 233c ( 12), a display type command for notifying the display content to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated, and a process for transmitting the generated display command to the sound lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In addition, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b, if the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, In accordance with the accessory driving information, a process for generating an accessory operation start command including information on a movable accessory type to be started from now on and information on its operation mode and transmitting the command to the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. .

  Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, a task process is then executed (S2604). In this task process, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2603). In addition to specifying, for each sprite, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2605). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 14 is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2604). Transmit to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2606). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2606, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than 15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out of reach, out of front / rear out) The stop type table corresponding to the reach (completely missed) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S1402), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

  In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2701: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702), and then The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed (S2703).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display special figure 1 reserved ball number command or a display special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S2704). If there is a number command or display special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S2704: Yes), the held ball number command process is executed (S2705), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36A, details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2705) will be described. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball number command processing, first, the new reserved ball number command flag is turned on (S2801). The display reserve series command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S1403) that the display hold ball number command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the reserved ball number information included in the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used for the special figure 1 (variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64). It is acquired in association with the number of reserved balls or the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 (variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640) (S1602).

  In the process of S1602, if two or more display special figure 1 reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stored ball number information is obtained from the last stored special figure 1 reserved ball number command. get. Thereby, the reserve ball number information with respect to the latest special figure 1 can be acquired. Similarly, if two or more display special figure 2 reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command stored last. Thereby, the reserve ball number information for the latest special figure 2 can be acquired.

  Of the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, when the number of reserved balls for the special figure 1 is acquired in the process of S2802, it corresponds to the number of reserved balls. While turning on the number determination flag in FIG. 1 and turning off the number determination flag in FIG. 1 corresponding to the number of other reserved balls (S2803), the process returns to the command determination process. When the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 is acquired in the process of S2802, the number discrimination flag of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is turned on, and the special figure 2 corresponding to the other number of reserved balls is also displayed. The number determination flag is turned off (S2803), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the new reserved ball number command flag is ON, the number determination flag in FIG. 1 and the number determination flag in FIG. 2 are referred to correspond to the number determination flag set to ON. The reserved image data is developed so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls to be displayed is displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 for the special figure 1 and in the second reserved display area Ds2 for the special figure 2.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the processing of S2704 that there is neither a display special figure 1 reserved ball number command nor a display special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S2704: No), then, among the unprocessed commands, Whether there is a display confirmation command (S2706). If there is a display confirmation command (S2706: Yes), the confirmation command processing is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the confirmation command process (S2707) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command process executes a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command process (S2707), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2811), and this process ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, after processing the setting of the display of the variation effect, if the confirmed command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for the variation effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the display setting process is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the processing of S2706 that there is no display confirmation command (S2706: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demonstration command (S2708) (S2708: Yes), the demonstration command processing is executed (S2709), and the processing returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the demo command process (S2709) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36C is a flowchart showing the demo command process. This demo command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display demo command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the demonstration command processing (S2709), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2821). Next, null data is written into the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2822).

  Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2824). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF, the demonstration display flag is set to ON, and the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S2825), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmed display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2824, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2821 is updated. Then, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect defined in the display data table for demonstration is counted using the time counter 233e in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S2823, and the process of S2825 is performed. Based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the above, when it is determined that the demonstration effect in the display data table for demonstration is ended by the timing of the display setting control time counter 233e, the effect to be displayed next Then, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Further, when both the confirmation command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is turned on. Then, the demo command process (S2709) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned off by the process of S2825.

  Thereby, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. Main controller 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if it does not come to the start timing of the changing effect after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command. When the execution of the command determination process is started, it is impossible for both the confirmed command and the demo command to be stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, when these commands are all stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, there is a high possibility that the command transmission / reception is not normally performed.

  In such a case, since the display control device 114 gives priority to the demonstration effect that is not directly related to the game and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display it on the third symbol display device 81, the wrong fixed display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player from misunderstanding the game result. In addition, since the demonstration effect is started without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a hall related person to request a countermeasure.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the processing of S2708 that there is no display demo command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation pattern command (S2710: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, based on the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command for display, one detailed variation pattern is executed from among a plurality of detailed variation patterns in which variation effects are executed in the variation time. A variation pattern is determined (S2831). The detailed variation pattern determined here uniquely determines the content of the notice effect performed during the change effect, and uniquely determines the operation mode of the first accessory 87 operated in the notice effect.

  Next, for the determined details, the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2832).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2832, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the change effect having the change time shorter than the set display data table is actually controlled by the main control. When instructed by the device 110, the main controller 110 displays a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when a variation effect having a variation time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, a confirmation command from the main controller 110 is obtained. Until the display confirmation command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed, so that the player visually recognizes the restart effect as part of the variable effect. Until the stop display of the 3rd symbol is confirmed, the variation of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be continuously observed without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233b (S2833). Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2832, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233e (S2834). The pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2836).

  By setting the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag to OFF, it is possible to display the varying effect on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the demonstration effect or the confirmed display effect being displayed. Further, when both the confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag Is set to ON, then, this variation pattern command process (S2711) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned OFF by the process of S2836.

  When the processing of S2836 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the detailed variation pattern determined in the processing of S2831 is accompanied by a one-shot notification chance effect (S2837). If it is accompanied by a one-shot notification chance effect (S2837: Yes), when the number of one-shot notification chances, that is, when the result of the fluctuating effect is a big hit, the process shifts from the one-shot notification chance effect to the one-shot notification effect. The predetermined number of times that the first accessory 87 reaches the one notification chance position (position of 80 steps from the origin position) necessary for the purpose is determined by drawing one to five times and determined one notification chance The number of times is stored in one notification chance number memory 233f (S2838). Then, the process proceeds to S2839.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S2837 that the single announcement chance effect is not accompanied (S2837: No), the process of S2838 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2839.

  In the process of S2838, for the lottery of the number of single notification chances, for example, a counter for lottering the number of single notification chances is provided in the RAM 233, and the counter is updated for various counters in the V interrupt process (S2606). The number of notification chances is determined based on the value of the counter when the processing of S2838 is performed.

  In the process of S2839, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2837). Then, the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2832 while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S2835. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified.

  Further, in the display setting process, using the time counter 233e in which the variation time data is set by the processing of S2834, the variation effect time defined in the variation display data table is counted, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been completed, a confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the end of the variation effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command, the display Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. In contrast, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so the confirmation command process corresponding to the display confirmation command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for use is executed later, and the fixed command flag set by the display fixed command can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S2836. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display demo command, Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, so the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for execution is executed later, and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the display data table for change by overwriting as in the process of S2832. Can do. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S2710 (S2710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display stop type command (S2711: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2713) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete miss, special stop symbol) ) Is determined (S2841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 34B) is executed. Thus, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2842).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2842 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2843), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for change, the processing of S1642 is performed as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the task process (S2604), after the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2842 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in S2843, and the identification is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. There is also the possibility of being interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2841, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even when the stop type is completely off.

  Here, if a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off. The player may misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in this embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a big hit, the stop symbol of complete detachment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in step S2712 that there is no display stop type command (S2712: No), next, processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2722), and step S2701 is performed. Return to.

  In the process of S2701, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes). ), The processing of S2702 to S2722 is executed again. Then, the processes in S2701 to S2722 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2701 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701: No) ), The command determination process is terminated.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S2603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2901), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2901: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S2902 to S2904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2905. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S2901: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S2902), S2903 By each process of S2904, a process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S2903, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S2903). If the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S2903: Yes), the display is performed in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2904).

  Here, the details of the hold image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In the reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, it is a process for developing the image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, with reference to the number determination flag of FIG. 1 and the number determination flag of FIG. 2, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag of FIG. A reserved ball corresponding to the number determination flag of the special figure 2 in which the on-hold image data for displaying the several symbols in the first reserved display area Ds1 (see FIG. 5) of the third symbol display device 81 is set to ON is set. The reserved image data to be displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 (see FIG. 5) of the number of reserved balls for several minutes in the second symbol display device 81 is developed (S2951). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified based on the developed reserved image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the reserved image setting process, after the process of S2951, the new reserved ball number command is set to OFF (S2952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 39, after the hold image setting process (S2904) or in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2903: No), then , The process proceeds to S2905.

  In S2905, pointer update processing is executed (S2905). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing is performed by updating the pointer 233g that designates an address at which the corresponding drawing content is to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. It is a process to perform.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S2981). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233c by the processing of S1781, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c is End information. Is discriminated (S2982). As a result, if it is End information (S2982: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, the pointer 233c has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is a demonstration display data table or a restart display data table (S2983), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S2984), and further corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is set in the time counter 233e (S2985), and the process proceeds to S2987. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demonstration effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2983, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither the display data table for demonstration nor the restart display data table (S2983: No), the pointer 233c The value is subtracted by 1 (S2986), and the process proceeds to S2987. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a display data table for change or a fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a. Since the drawing content of the previous address in which End information is written is always developed, the third image display device 81 displays the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  As a result of the processing of S2982, when it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the processing of S2981 is not End information (S2982: No) ), The process of S2983 to S2986 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2987.

  In the process of S2987, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2987). If the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S2987: No), the pointer update process is terminated and display setting is completed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2987: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, so that the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233c is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233a (S2988), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S2989), the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

  Returning to FIG. 39, after the pointer update process (S2905), the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process is displayed from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents of drawing at the address to be expanded are developed (S2906). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S2906 together with the pending image previously expanded, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. When Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with null data, the null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  In the processing of S2906, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. If the contents (see FIG. 12) are defined, a display type command for notifying the display contents to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated, and the generated display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the audio output device 226 outputs audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command.

  Further, in the processing of S2906, when the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. Then, according to the accessory driving information, an accessory operation start command including information related to the operation mode of the first accessory 87 to be started is generated.

  Subsequently, in the process of S2906, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the accessory driving information is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. Then, it is determined from the accessory driving information whether or not it is time to start the one-shot notification chance effect (S2907). If it is time to start the one-shot notification chance effect, the number of one-shot notification chances is set in the accessory operation start command generated in S2906 (S2908).

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the currently performed variation effect is a big hit, and if it is a big win, the value (any one of 1 to 5) stored in the one notification chance number memory 233f is set to one. Set as an action start command for the number of notification chances. In addition, if the result of the variation effect currently being performed is out of the range, “6” is set as the accessory action start command as the number of one-shot notification chances.

  If the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command is the one-shot notification chance effect when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the process of S2908 from the accessory operation start command. Extract the set number of notification chances. If the number of one-shot notification chances is 1 to 5, the currently performed variation effect is a big hit, so the first actor 87 is only one notification chance number at the one-shot notification chance position. When it reaches, the 1st actor 87 will be lowered to the maximum point position, and it will shift to one announcement production.

  On the other hand, when the number of extracted one-shot notification chances is six, the currently performed variation effect is lost, so no matter how many times the first actor 87 reaches the one-shot notification chance position, one shot About 5 seconds after starting the one-shot announcement chance production without shifting to the announcement production, the one-shot announcement chance production is ended.

  After the process of S2908 or when it is determined by the process of S2907 that it is not the timing to start the one-shot notification chance effect (S2907: No), a process of transmitting an accessory operation start command is performed (S2909). . However, if the accessory operation start command is not generated by the process of S2906, the process of S2909 is skipped.

  After the process of S2909, the value of the time counter 233e is decremented by 1 (S2911), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2912). If the value of the time counter 233e is 1 or more (S2912: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233e is 0 or less (S2912: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has passed. At this time, if the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation command for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2913, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2913).

  As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2913: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. The mode of the fixed display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol determination flag is determined, the fixed display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are cleared (S2914). Next, time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display is set in the time counter 233e (S2915), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2916). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (S2917), and after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2918), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly used as the work RAM 233. (S2919), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when a display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233a or the like, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S2919 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is started from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, the variation based on the data table starts in the variation display data table. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is determined until a predetermined time elapses from this. In the task process (S2604), the stop symbol in the previous variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S2919 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. And the 3rd symbol which should be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information prescribed | regulated to the above-mentioned display data for a fluctuation | variation to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on in the process of S2913 (S2913: No), the process proceeds to S2920 shown in FIG. 40, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2920). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2920: Yes), the result of determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. Later (S2921), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2922), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the time counter 233e (S2923). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2924), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2925), and the V interrupt process is terminated.

  By this, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that the branch condition of S2920: Yes is when the confirmed display effect is being performed. In this case, the content of the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared by the process of S2914. Therefore, in the process of S2922, the clear process of those data table buffers is omitted. Thereby, the processing load in the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2920, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2920: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2926). If the demonstration display flag is on (S2926: Yes), the result of determination in the processing of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended. Return to interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2926, when the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S2926: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the changing effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the variation effect, the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a in order to start the restart effect. Accordingly, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2927), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S2928).

  If the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (S2928: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. When the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S2928: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b, and the contents are changed. Clear (S2929). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2930), the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2931), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the display control device 114, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. When (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated. When it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the stop is displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not fixed at that time.

  In addition, after the last drawing content prescribed | regulated by the restart display data table is expand | deployed, the drawing content is expand | deployed again from the head of the restart display data table by the above-mentioned pointer update process. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in such a manner that the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) around a predetermined position. In the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary to display the screen at least once are defined. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the restart effect is an effect that causes the 3rd symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the 3rd symbol, so that the 3rd symbol is swung at least once in the restart display data table. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents necessary for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

  If a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2914 shown in FIG. 39 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. A final display data table is set in 233a. Thus, even during the restart effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the final symbol display device 81 displays the final display effect. Can be displayed.

  If a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2832 of FIG. 37 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. In 233a, a display data table for variation is set, and a variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If a display demonstration command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2821 in FIG. 36C is performed, and the display data is displayed. A display data table for demonstration is set in the table buffer 233a, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be received is not received even if a predetermined time elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. Since the effect is displayed in this case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise or malfunction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects in the third symbol display device 81 can be performed in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2605), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), the drawing list shown in FIG. 14 is generated (S3001). That is, in the process of S3001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As the drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing target buffer information specified by a drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S3002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 as drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image. When the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM as drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S3002, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S3003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” if the value is “0” and setting it to “0” if it is “1”. Is called. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 34B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read, and image rendering is performed. When the processing and the display processing are executed, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. A first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. . Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are alternately designated for the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer every 20 milliseconds. As a result, the image display process for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image drawing process for one frame is being performed.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 51. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, an origin reference current position memory 223g that grasps the current position of the first accessory 87 with respect to the origin is provided corresponding to the origin detection sensor 88, and corresponds to the maximum point detection sensor 89. Thus, the case where the maximum point reference current position memory 223h for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87 on the basis of the maximum point has been described. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment provides only one current position memory 223q as a memory for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87, while the operation mode of the first accessory 87 is In accordance with the operation of the first accessory 87 determined based on this, the reference of the current position of the first accessory 87 grasped in the current position memory 223q is changed.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment has a configuration in which a part of data stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 and an accessory editing / output process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 ( Except for a part of the process in S1908) and a part of the display command determination process (S1916), the process is the same as the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. The RAM 223 according to the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 according to the first embodiment in that the current point reference current position memory 223h and the maximum point reference current position memory 223h provided in the first embodiment are replaced with the current points. This is a point where one position memory 223q is provided. Various other data stored in the RAM 223 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The current position memory 223q is a memory for storing the current position of the first accessory 87. The reference of the current position of the first accessory 87 stored in the current position memory 223q is changed according to the origin reference flag 223i. That is, when the origin reference flag 223i is on, the current position memory 223q stores the current position of the first accessory 87 based on the origin. On the other hand, when the origin reference flag 223i is off, the current position of the first accessory 87 on the basis of the maximum point is stored in the current position memory 223q.

  The origin reference flag 223i is updated by the accessory driving data table stored in the accessory driving data table buffer 223l. The accessory driving data table in the second embodiment not only defines the direction and amount of movement of the first accessory 87 in association with the timing information for starting the movement of the first accessory 87, but also The current position of the first accessory 87 that changes with the movement of the first accessory 87 is managed on the basis of the origin to control the movement of the first accessory 87, or is managed on the basis of the maximum point. Whether to control the movement of 87 is defined as the first accessory current position reference information.

  If the direction in which the first accessory 87 is moved, the movement amount thereof, and the first accessory current position reference information are associated with the referenced timing information, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the movement amount as follows: According to the moving direction, the forward movement amount memory 223e or the backward movement amount memory 223f is set, and the origin reference flag 223i is set according to the first accessory current position reference information. That is, if the first accessory current position reference information is information indicating that the current position of the first accessory 87 is managed based on the origin and the movement of the first accessory 87 is controlled, the origin reference flag 223i. Is turned on to indicate that the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the origin. In addition, if the first accessory current position reference information is information indicating that the current position of the first accessory 87 is managed based on the maximum point and the movement of the first accessory 87 is controlled, the origin reference flag 223i is set to OFF, indicating that the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50, the accessory editing / driving process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. 45 to 50 are flowcharts showing the accessory editing / driving process (S1908) in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the feature editing / driving process in the second embodiment will be described focusing on the processing different from the accessory editing / driving process in the first embodiment, and the same process as the accessory editing / driving process in the first embodiment. The description of is omitted.

  First, in the accessory editing / driving process in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the process of S5001 is executed instead of the process of S4008 (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. That is, when the initialization process (S4002 to S4007, S4009, S5001) for moving the first accessory 87 to the origin position is being executed, if the origin detection sensor 88 is determined to be on by the process of S4003 ( S4003: Yes), it means that the first accessory 87 has reached the origin position, so in order to finish the initialization of the first accessory 87, the forward movement amount memory 223e is set to 0 and the reverse direction The movement amount memory 223f is set to 0, the current position memory 223g is set to 0, the origin reference flag 223i is set to ON, and the contents of the RAM 223 necessary for operating the first accessory 87 are initialized. (S5001). Then, the process proceeds to S4009.

  Next, in the accessory editing / driving process in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, the current position of the first accessory 87 is initialized based on the detection results of the origin detection sensor 88 and the maximum point detection sensor 89. In processing (S4010, S4012, S4015 to S4017, S5002 to S5006) for determining an abnormality related to the operation of the first accessory 87, it is first determined whether or not the origin reference flag 223i is on (S5002). If the origin reference flag 223i is on (S5002: Yes), it is determined whether the origin detection sensor 88 is on (S4010).

  As a result, if the origin detection sensor 88 is on (S4010: Yes), it means that the first accessory 87 is located at the origin position, so the process proceeds to S5003. In order to stop the operation of the object 87, the forward movement amount memory 223e and the backward movement amount memory 223f are set to zero. Further, when the origin reference flag 223i is turned on, 0 is set to initialize the current position memory 223g for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87 on the basis of the origin. Furthermore, the time when the first action 87 is not detected by the origin detection sensor 88 or the first action 87 should be at the maximum point position even though the first action 87 should be at the origin position. Nevertheless, the first point undetected counter 223j for counting the time when the first point 87 is not detected by the maximum point detection sensor 89 is initialized to 0 (S5003). After the process of S5003, the process proceeds to the process of S4019 shown in FIG.

  Although the sound lamp control device 113 has driven the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a by the processing of S5002, S4010, and S5003, the sound lamp control device 113 assumes mechanical slipping or the like. Even if a deviation occurs between the position of the first accessory 87 and the actual position of the first accessory 87, the deviation can be corrected as appropriate. Therefore, it can suppress that the movement of the up-and-down direction of the 1st actor 87 shifts greatly.

  If the origin detection sensor 88 is not on as a result of the processing of S4010 (S4010: No), it is next determined whether the current position memory 223q is 100 and the maximum point detection sensor 89 is off (S5004). When this determination is made, the origin reference flag 223i is on and the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the origin. Therefore, when the current position memory 223q is 100, the first accessory 87 is the maximum. It should be located at the point position.

  Therefore, when it is determined from the processing of S5004 that the current position memory 223q is 100 and the maximum point detection sensor 89 is OFF (S5004: Yes), the first accessory 87 is positioned at the maximum point position. In spite of the fact that the first point 87 is not detected to be located at the maximum point position by the maximum point detection sensor 89, the same processes of S4015 to S4017 as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 25). Execute. As a result, the first point 87 has reached the maximum point position by the maximum point detection sensor 89 even though one second has passed since the first point 87 was supposed to reach the maximum point position. If it cannot be detected, it is determined that the first accessory 87 is operating outside the control by the sound lamp control device 113, or that the maximum point detection sensor 89 is out of order, and the first accessory 87 is moved to the origin position. And the operation of the first accessory 87 can be invalidated. After the processing of S4015 to S4017, the process proceeds to S4019 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the current position memory 223q is not 100 or the maximum point detection sensor 89 is determined to be on (S5004: No) as a result of the process of S5004, the process proceeds to S4019 of FIG. .

  As a result of the processing in S5002, when it is determined that the origin reference flag 223i is off (S5002: No), it is determined whether or not the maximum point detection sensor 89 is on (S4012). If the maximum point detection sensor 89 is on (S4012: Yes), it means that the first accessory 87 is located at the maximum point position. Therefore, the process proceeds to S5005. In order to stop the operation of the object 87, the forward movement amount memory 223e and the backward movement amount memory 223f are set to zero. Further, when the origin reference flag 223i is turned off, 0 is set to initialize the current position memory 223h for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87 on the basis of the maximum point. Furthermore, the time when the first action 87 is not detected by the origin detection sensor 88 or the first action 87 should be at the maximum point position even though the first action 87 should be at the origin position. Nevertheless, the first point undetected counter 223j for counting the time when the first point 87 is not detected by the maximum point detection sensor 89 is initialized to 0 (S5005). After the process of S5003, the process proceeds to the process of S4019 shown in FIG.

  Although the sound lamp control device 113 has driven the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a by the processing of S5002, S4012, and S5005, the sound lamp control device 113 assumes mechanical slipping or the like. Even if a deviation occurs between the position of the first accessory 87 and the actual position of the first accessory 87, the deviation can be corrected as appropriate. Therefore, it can suppress that the movement of the up-and-down direction of the 1st actor 87 shifts greatly.

  If the maximum point detection sensor 89 is not on as a result of the processing of S4012 (S4012: No), it is next determined whether the current position memory 223q is 100 and the origin detection sensor 88 is off (S5006). When this determination is made, the origin reference flag 223i is off and the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point. Therefore, when the current position memory 223q is 100, the first accessory 87 is It should be at the origin position.

  Therefore, when it is determined from the processing of S5006 that the current position memory 223q is 100 and the origin detection sensor 88 is off (S5006: Yes), the first accessory 87 should be located at the origin position. Nevertheless, since the origin detection sensor 89 does not detect that the first accessory 87 is located at the origin position, the same processes of S4015 to S4017 (see FIG. 25) as in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, the first point 87 has reached the maximum point position by the maximum point detection sensor 89 even though one second has passed since the first point 87 was supposed to reach the maximum point position. If it cannot be detected, it is determined that the first accessory 87 is operating outside the control by the sound lamp control device 113, or that the maximum point detection sensor 89 is out of order, and the first accessory 87 is moved to the origin position. And the operation of the first accessory 87 can be invalidated. After the processing of S4015 to S4017, the process proceeds to S4019 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the current position memory 223q is not 100 or the origin detection sensor 88 is determined to be on (S5006: No) as a result of the process of S5006, the process proceeds to S4019 of FIG.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the current position memory 223q grasps the current position of the first accessory 87 on the basis of the origin based on the origin reference flag 223i, the current position memory 223q is initialized ( 0 is set only when the origin detection sensor 88 is turned on and the first accessory 87 is located at the origin position. Further, the determination of the abnormality of the operation of the first accessory 87 is performed only when the current position memory 223q is 100 and the first accessory 87 is not detected by the maximum point detection sensor 89.

  When the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped in the current position memory 223q on the basis of the maximum point, initialization of the current position memory 223q (setting of 0) turns on the maximum point detection sensor 89, It is performed only when the first accessory 87 is located at the maximum point position. Further, the determination of the abnormality of the operation of the first accessory 87 is performed only when the current position memory 223q is 100 and the first accessory 87 is not detected by the origin detection sensor 89.

  Thus, even if only one current position memory 223q is provided as a memory for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87, the reference of the current position of the first accessory 87 by the origin reference flag 223i. This makes it possible to correctly determine the timing of initializing the current position memory 223q and the abnormal operation of the first accessory 87, and execute the corresponding processing.

  In addition, the current position memory 223q initialized by the origin detection sensor 88 in a state where the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the origin becomes 100, and the first accessory 87 should be at the maximum point position. Nevertheless, if the first combination 87 is not detected by the maximum point detection sensor 89, it is determined that the operation of the first combination 87 is in an abnormal state. Further, the current position memory 223q initialized by the maximum point detection sensor 89 in a state where the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point becomes 100, and the first accessory 87 should be at the origin position. Nevertheless, if the first combination 87 is not detected by the origin detection sensor 88, it is determined that the operation of the first combination 87 is in an abnormal state.

  Since the current position memory 223q is initialized to 0 when the origin detection sensor 88 and the maximum point detection sensor 89 detect the presence of the first accessory 87, the current position memory 223q is highly accurate. The current position of the single actor 87 can be indicated. Therefore, the presence of the first accessory 87 is estimated using the current position with high accuracy, and the operation of the first accessory 87 depends on the detection state of the first accessory 87 by the maximum point detection sensor 89 or the origin detection sensor 88. It can be determined with high accuracy whether or not there is an abnormal state. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the recognition rate of the abnormal state of the operation of the first accessory 87 is bad or, conversely, the operation of the first accessory 87 is determined to be in an abnormal state even though it is not in the abnormal state. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Next, in the accessory editing / driving process in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, the process of S5007 is executed instead of the process of S4023 (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, and the process of S4024 (FIG. 26). The process of S5008 is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 26), the process of S5009 is executed instead of the process of S4029 (see FIG. 26), and the process of S5010 is executed instead of the process of S4030 (see FIG. 26).

  That is, based on the movement amount set in the forward movement amount memory 2223e and the reverse movement amount memory 223f, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to move the first accessory 87 in the vertical direction. In the process (S4019 to S4022, S4025 to S4028, S4031 to S4034) for driving the first accessory rotating motor 87e to rotate the first accessory 87, the first accessory 87 is set to 1 in the forward direction. After the process of driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a (S4020) is executed in order to move by the step, the origin reference flag 223i is determined to be on in the process of S4022 (S4022). : Yes), since the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the origin, 1 is added to the current position memory 233q (S5007), and the process proceeds to S4034. That. If it is determined in S4022 that the origin reference flag 223i is off (S4022: No), the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point, so the current position memory 233q is stored. 1 is subtracted (S5008), and the process proceeds to S4034.

  Further, in order to move the first accessory 87 in the reverse direction by one step, the process of driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a (S4026) is executed, and then the origin reference flag is obtained in the process of S4028. If it is determined that 223i is on (S4028: Yes), since the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the origin, the current position memory 233q is decremented by 1 (S5009), and the process proceeds to S4034. To do. If it is determined in the process of S4028 that the origin reference flag 223i is off (S4028: No), the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point, so that the current position memory 233q is stored. 1 is added (S5010), and the process proceeds to S4034.

  Thus, even if only one current position memory 223q is provided as a memory for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87, the reference of the current position of the first accessory 87 by the origin reference flag 223i. This makes it possible to correctly update the current position memory 223q.

  Next, in the accessory editing / driving process in the second embodiment, the process of S5011 is executed instead of the process of S4039 (see FIG. 27). That is, in order to drive the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a according to the accessory data table set in the accessory data table buffer 223l, the first accessory is transferred to the forward movement amount memory 223e or the backward movement amount memory 223f. In the process of setting the vertical movement amount of 87 (S4037, S4038, S5011, S4040 to S4042), the process from S4038 is performed by using the accessory drive data table stored in the accessory drive data table buffer 223l. The timing information indicated by the object driving pointer 223m is referred to, and when it is determined that the timing information is associated with the direction in which the first accessory 87 is moved and the amount of movement (object driving data) (S4038). : Yes), which is the accessory driving data, the direction and amount of movement of the first accessory 87 Accordingly, the forward movement amount memory 223e or the backward movement amount memory 223f is set, and the origin reference flag 223i is set based on the first accessory current position reference information defined together as the accessory driving data. (S5011), the process proceeds to S4040.

  That is, in the processing of S5011, if the first accessory current position reference information is information indicating that the current position of the first accessory 87 is managed based on the origin and the movement of the first accessory 87 is controlled. The origin reference flag 223i is set to ON to indicate that the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the origin. In addition, if the first accessory current position reference information is information indicating that the current position of the first accessory 87 is managed based on the maximum point and the movement of the first accessory 87 is controlled, the origin reference flag 223i is set to OFF, indicating that the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point.

  Thereby, the origin reference flag 223i is based on the accessory driving data table that defines the vertical movement of the first accessory 87, and the reference of the current position of the first accessory 87 required for the driving control is obtained. It can be changed in accordance with the driving of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a.

  Next, in the accessory editing / driving process in the second embodiment, the process of S5012 is executed instead of the process of S4051 (see FIG. 27). That is, in the process (S4043 to S4050, S4052 to S4060, S5012) for performing control for executing the one-shot notification chance effect, the forward movement amount memory 223e and the backward movement are determined according to the operation state of the frame button 22. When the charge memory 223f is set (S4043 to S4050), it is then determined whether the origin reference flag 223i is on and the value of the current position memory 223q is 80 (S5012).

  As a result, if the origin reference flag 223i is off or the current position memory 223q is not 80 (S5012: No), the process proceeds to S4057. On the other hand, when the origin reference flag 223i is on and the value of the current position memory 223q is 80 (S5012: Yes), the first accessory 87 is located at the position of 80 steps from the origin position, which is one notification chance position. Therefore, the process proceeds to S4052.

  Thus, even if only one current position memory 223q is provided as a memory for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87, the reference of the current position of the first accessory 87 by the origin reference flag 223i. It is possible to correctly determine that the first role 87 has reached the one-shot notification chance position.

  Next, in the accessory editing / driving process in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, a process (S4061, S4063, S4065) for setting the amount of movement of the first accessory 87 in order to execute one notification effect. In S4069, S5013 to S5017), if it is determined by the processing in S4061 that the accessory driving pointer 233m is not 3000 (S4061: Yes), the origin reference flag 223i is on and the current position memory 223q is 100. It is determined whether or not there is (S5013). When the origin reference flag 223i is on and the current position memory 223q is 100 (S5013: Yes), the first action 87 is caused by the transition from the one-shot notification chance effect to the one-shot notification effect. Means a state in which the position is moved from the one-shot notification chance position to the maximum point position. Therefore, in this case, the origin reference 223i is turned off so that the current position of the first accessory 87 is grasped on the basis of the maximum point, and the current position memory 223i is set to 0 so that the first position at the maximum point position is set. The current position of the single accessory 87 is represented by the maximum standard (S5014). Then, 1 is added to the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4066), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the origin reference flag 223i is not on or the current position memory 223q is not 100 (S5013: No), then the origin reference flag 223i is off and the value of the current position memory 223q is 0. If the origin reference flag 223i is off and the value of the current position memory 223q is 0 (S5015: Yes), it is determined that the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position. it can. Therefore, in this case, the same processing of S4063 as in the first embodiment (see S29) is executed, 15 is set in the backward movement amount memory 223f, and 0 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e. (S4063). Accordingly, when the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position, the first accessory 87 is moved from the maximum point position to the one notification minimum position (that is, a position 15 steps above the maximum point position). Is moved. Then, 1 is added to the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4066), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5015, when the origin reference flag 223i is on or when it is determined that the value of the current position memory 223q is not 0 (S5015: No), then the origin reference flag 223i is off. Whether the current position memory value is 15 is determined (S5016). If the origin reference flag 223i is off and the value of the current position memory is 15 (S5016: Yes), the first accessory 87 is the minimum position for one notification (a position 15 steps above the maximum point position). ), The same processing of S4065 as in the first embodiment (see S29) is executed, 15 is set in the forward movement amount memory 223e, and 0 is set in the backward movement amount memory 223f. (S4065). Accordingly, when the first accessory 87 is 15 steps above the maximum point position, the first accessory 87 is moved from the maximum point position to the one notification minimum position. Then, 1 is added to the accessory driving pointer 223m (S4066), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated.

  As described above, the first accessory 87 is moved to the one notification minimum position when it reaches the maximum point position, and is moved to the one notification minimum position when it reaches the one notification minimum position. Therefore, while the one notification notification effect is being performed, the first accessory 87 moves back and forth between the one notification minimum position and the maximum point position.

  Even if only one current position memory 223q is provided as a memory for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87, the reference of the current position of the first accessory 87 is set by the origin reference flag 223i. By clarifying, it is possible to reliably perform control for reciprocating between the one notification minimum position and the maximum point position with respect to the first accessory 87.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing of S4061 that the accessory driving pointer 223m is 3000 (S4061: Yes), the same processing of S4067 to S4069 (see FIG. 29) as in the first embodiment is executed, and the origin The reference flag 223i is set to ON, the value of the current position memory 223q is set to 100 (S5017), and the accessory editing / driving process is terminated. As a result, the first action up / down motion motor 87a is moved so that the first action 87 moves 100 steps in the reverse direction after 3 seconds have passed since the transition from the one-shot notification chance effect to the one-notification effect effect. Driven. Therefore, in this case, the first accessory 87 can be moved to the origin position. Further, the current position of the first accessory 87 can be correctly grasped by the processing of S5017.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the display command determination process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the display command determination process.

  The difference between the display command determination process in the second embodiment and the display command determination process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is that the first accessory indicated by the accessory action start command received from the display control device 114. When the operation mode is a one-shot notification chance effect (S2207: Yes), the same processing as S2210 and S2211 as in the first embodiment is executed, and then the origin reference flag 223i is set to ON (S5101). Thereafter, the display command determination process ends. Even if only one current position memory 223q is provided as a memory for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87 by setting the origin reference flag 223i to ON by the processing of S5101, By clarifying the reference of the current position of the first accessory 87 by the reference flag 223i, the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 can be performed while accurately grasping the current position of the first accessory 87 even during execution of the one-shot notification chance effect. Can be controlled.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiments are added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Moreover, the numerical value quoted in each said embodiment is an example, and it is naturally possible to employ | adopt another numerical value.

  In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 detects the position of the first accessory 87 as the sensor for detecting the position of the first accessory 87 at the origin position, Although the case where the two detection sensors including the maximum point detection sensor 89 for detecting that the accessory 87 is located at the maximum point position is provided has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Any number of detection sensors for detecting the position 87 may be provided. Further, the position at which the sensor for detecting the position of the first accessory 87 is not necessarily the origin or the maximum point, and may be provided at an arbitrary position within a range in which the first accessory 87 can move.

  When the number of detection sensors for detecting the position of the first accessory 87 is three or more, a current position memory corresponding to the detection sensor may be provided for each detection sensor as in the first embodiment. In the case where only one current position memory is provided even though a plurality of detection sensors for detecting the position of the first accessory 87 are provided, the current position is detected when the first accessory 87 is detected by each detection sensor. When the memory is initialized, the current position memory is initialized based on the detection of which detection sensor, and thereafter, it may become difficult to know which detection sensor is used as a reference to know the position of the first accessory 87. is there. On the other hand, if a current position memory corresponding to the detection sensor is provided for each detection sensor, when the first accessory 87 is detected by a certain detection sensor, only the current position memory corresponding to the detection sensor is initialized. After that, the current position of the first accessory 87 can be managed with reference to the corresponding detection sensor in the current position memory. Therefore, each current position memory can surely grasp the position of the first accessory 87 with reference to the corresponding detection sensor.

  Further, when the number of detection sensors for detecting the position of the first accessory 87 is three or more, a current position memory that is a memory for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87 is provided as in the second embodiment. While only one is provided, the reference of the current position of the first accessory 87 grasped in the current position memory is changed in accordance with the operation of the first accessory 87 determined based on the operation mode of the first accessory 87. May be. This is a case where only one current position memory is provided as a memory for grasping the current position of the first accessory 87, even though there are a plurality of detection sensors for detecting the position of the first accessory 87. However, it is possible to accurately grasp the current position of the first accessory 87 and control the operation of the first accessory 87.

  In each of the above embodiments, the origin detection sensor 88 and the maximum point detection sensor 89 are provided with a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and light directed from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked by the protrusion 87f provided with the slide gear 87d. In this way, the position of the first accessory 87 is detected. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first accessory 87 is brought into contact with the protrusion 87f provided on the slide gear 87d. May be detected. In addition, as a method for detecting the position of the first accessory 87, any method may be adopted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the operation timing of the first accessory 87 is uniquely determined according to the detailed variation pattern determined in the display control device 114 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. About the 1st actor 87, the timing of the operation is decided by lottery of the display control device 114 so that it is operated at random timing during the period where the variation effect is performed regardless of the detailed variation pattern. May be. Thereby, the player can play the game while expecting the first action 87 to always operate during the period in which the changing performance is performed, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced. .

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first combination 87, which is a disk-shaped movable combination provided on the upper side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81, is exemplified as the movable combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. .

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the first accessory 87 is provided with the first accessory up / down movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e. Only the drive pattern of the accessory vertical movement motor 87a is defined, and the case where the first accessory rotation motor 87e is driven when the first accessory 87 is in a predetermined position according to the drive pattern has been described. On the other hand, as the accessory driving data table of the first accessory 87, the driving pattern is defined for two of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotating motor 87e, and according to the driving pattern, The first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e may be controlled. Thereby, the operation | movement aspect of the 1st accessory 87 can be made more various.

  On the other hand, for example, three or more driving means (solenoid, motor, etc.) are provided in one movable accessory, and only the driving pattern of one driving means is defined as the accessory driving control data stored in the ROM, and the driving is performed. When one driving means is being driven according to the pattern, the other two driving means may be driven. As a result, the designer of the pachinko machine 10 only needs to design the driving pattern of one driving means, and the design burden can be reduced. Further, since only the driving pattern of one driving means is defined and stored in the ROM as the accessory driving control data, an increase in the storage capacity necessary for the ROM can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, Display data table is prepared for each element such as “Fluctuation start-up”, “High-speed fluctuation”, “Notice effect”, “Normal reach”, “Super reach”, and according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the elements necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may make it do. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every image display interval (one 20 ms in each of the above embodiments) for completing the drawing process. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which a rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image first developed from the other frame buffer. The case where information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives a drawing list, a frame in which the drawn image is to be developed. Alternatively, the buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9”, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, a third symbol composed of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the display data table has been described with respect to the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at that time is specified corresponding to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit. The display contents are not limited to those described above, and any display contents may be defined as long as they are defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since an image of one frame is displayed every time, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved series counter 223b is decreased by 1 ( Although description has been given of the case of S2107 to S2111 in FIG. 31, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the special control 1 of the main control device 110 is subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command being set by the variation start processing (S1308). The special figure is set so that the value (NA) of the reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (see S1310 and S1305 in FIG. 17) is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. 1 hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is set, and the special figure 1 hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. It may be transmitted to the device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of balls held by the main control device 110. In this case, S2107 to S2111 in FIG. 31 are omitted.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device is connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp from the display control device, and an accessory operation start command for instructing the start of operation of the accessory, You may comprise so that it may transmit to a control apparatus. At this time, the display control device determines a detailed variation pattern based on the command received directly from the main control device 110, and based on the detailed variation pattern, from the display control device to the sound lamp control device, You may transmit the command which instruct | indicates the output of each audio | voice and lighting of a lamp | ramp, and the accessory operation start command which instruct | indicates the operation | movement start of a movable accessory. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag, The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display type command and the accessory operation start command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the sound lamp control device 113, a display type flag and an accessory operation start flag are generated, and based on the display type flag. Then, the voice data may be read from the voice data storage area 222a and set in the reproduction voice data storage area 223d, or the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action start flag is based on the accessory action start flag. A solenoid or a motor provided in the movable accessory may be driven so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the object operation start flag.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning at the first entrance 64, the winning at the second entrance 640, and the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 are each held up to four times. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, in some parts of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the second entrance 640 are: The display may be displayed in numbers or in a form (for example, color or lighting pattern) that is different from the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. The lamp may be separated from the first symbol display device 37. A light emitting member such as a light emitting member may be provided, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member.

  In addition, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the fluctuating effect that is a kind of dynamic display is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means In the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, a movable accessory provided in the game area; A driving unit for operating the movable combination; a determination unit for determining an operation mode of the movable combination based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit; and the determination Based on the operation mode determined by the means, the drive control means for controlling the drive means to operate the movable accessory, and when the power is turned on, the drive means is controlled to control the movable combination. Things are not While the initialization processing means for executing the process of moving the movable combination to the initial position that should exist at the time of the operation, and the process of moving the movable combination to the initial position by the initialization processing means, Non-execution means for non-execution of control of the drive means based on the operation mode by the drive control means, and initial position detection for detecting the presence of the movable accessory in the initial position And when the process of moving the movable accessory to the initial value is executed by the initialization processing means, the movable accessory is present at the initial position by the initial position detecting means. A gaming machine A1 comprising: an ending unit that terminates the execution of the processing by the initialization processing unit in response to the detection.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the determination unit makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. Is done. Then, in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, a movable combination is provided in the game area, and based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit, the operation mode of the movable combination is determined by the determination unit, and the determined operation mode Based on the above, the drive means is controlled by the drive control means, and the movable accessory operates according to the operation mode. On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the initialization processing means executes a process of controlling the driving means to move the movable accessory to the initial position where the movable accessory should exist when not operating. Further, while the process for moving the movable accessory to the initial position is executed by the initialization processing means, the control of the drive means based on the operation mode by the drive control means is not executed by the non-execution means. Then, when the initial position detecting means detects that the movable combination is present at the initial position, the execution of the process of moving the movable combination to the initial value by the initialization processing means is terminated. Is terminated. As a result, as soon as the movable accessory is moved to the initial position by the processing by the initialization processing means, the control of the driving means by the drive control means which has been non-executed by the non-execution means can be executed. Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the end of the process of moving the movable accessory to the initial position is judged by taking a sufficient time to move the movable accessory to the initial position. Therefore, even if the movable accessory is in the vicinity of the initial position immediately after the power is turned on and immediately moved to the initial position, it is based on the operation mode in which the movable accessory is determined until the sufficient time has elapsed. Could not be operated. On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, as soon as the movable accessory is moved to the initial position by the processing by the initialization processing means, the drive control means by the drive control means not executed by the non-execution means is immediately controlled. In particular, even if a momentary power failure occurs and the process of moving the movable accessory to the initial position is performed, the movable accessory is moved to the initial position and can be operated. At this stage, the movable accessory can be operated immediately based on the determined operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the state in which the movable accessory does not operate based on the dynamic display of the identification information even though the movable accessory has been moved to the initial position, and to make the player feel uncomfortable. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means In the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, a movable accessory provided in the game area; Driving means for operating the movable accessory, and driving necessary for driving the driving means for causing the movable accessory to perform the operation indicated by the operation type for each operation type of the movable accessory A storage unit that stores information; a determination unit that determines an operation mode of the movable accessory from a plurality of operation modes based on a dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit; The deciding factor Included in the combination based on the combination of the operation type of the movable combination that is determined by the determination unit, and the combination of the operation type of the movable combination determined by the determination unit The drive information corresponding to the operation types of all the movable combinations to be read is read from the storage means, and the operations shown in the operation mode are performed on the movable combinations, so that the drive necessary for driving the drive means is performed. A gaming machine B1 comprising: generating means for generating information; and drive control means for driving the driving means based on driving information generated by the generating means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the determination unit makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. Is done. Then, in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, a movable combination is provided in the game area, and the movable combination is operated by the driving means. For each operation type of the movable combination, drive information necessary for driving the drive unit to cause the movable combination to perform the operation indicated by the operation type is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit, the operation mode of the movable accessory is determined by the determination unit from the plurality of operation modes, and the determined operation mode is The combination of the operation types of the movable accessory to be configured is determined by the determining means. Based on the combination of the operation types of the movable combination determined by the determination unit, the drive information corresponding to the operation types of all the movable combinations included in the combination is read out by the storage unit and indicated in the operation mode. Driving information necessary for driving the driving means to cause the movable accessory to perform an operation is generated by the generating means. Based on the generated drive information, the drive control means drives the drive means. In the conventional gaming machine, the drive information is stored in the storage means for each operation mode. However, a common operation type is included among the operation modes as the operation type of the movable accessory constituting the operation mode. There are many cases. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 2, for each action type of the movable accessory, the drive information necessary for driving the drive means to cause the movable accessory to perform the operation indicated by the action type is stored in the storage means. Since it is stored, there is no need to have the same drive information between operation modes as in a conventional gaming machine, and there is an effect that the storage capacity required to store the drive information can be suppressed.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means In the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, a movable accessory provided in the game area; A driving unit for operating the movable combination; a determination unit for determining an operation mode of the movable combination based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit; and the determination Drive control means for controlling the drive means to operate the movable accessory based on the operation mode determined by the means, and control of the drive means by the drive control means. Calculated by the calculation means based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means by the calculation means for calculating the position, the position detection means for detecting that the movable accessory is present at a predetermined position, and the drive control means. In addition, when it is determined that the position of the movable accessory has reached the predetermined position, it is in an abnormal state if the position detecting means does not detect that the movable accessory is present at the predetermined position. An abnormal state determining means for determining the abnormality, and an abnormality that controls the driving means so that the movable accessory moves to an initial position that should be present when the abnormal condition is determined when the abnormal state is determined by the abnormal state determining means. A gaming machine C1 comprising a time drive control means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the determination unit makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the dynamic display execution unit executes dynamic display of identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. Is done. Then, in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, a movable combination is provided in the game area, and based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit, the operation mode of the movable combination is determined by the determination unit, and the determined operation mode Based on the above, the drive means is controlled by the drive control means, and the movable accessory operates according to the operation mode. At this time, based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means, the position of the movable accessory is calculated by the calculation means. Here, if it is determined that the position of the movable accessory calculated by the calculation means has reached the predetermined position, if the position detection means does not detect that the movable accessory is present at the predetermined position, an abnormality is detected. It is determined by the abnormal state determination means that the state is in the state, and the drive means is controlled by the abnormal time drive control means so that the movable accessory moves to the initial position that should exist when not operating. Thereby, there exists an effect that it can suppress that the movable accessory which became the abnormal condition can interfere with a game.

  In the gaming machine C1, the driving means is operated by the driving means after the driving means is controlled by the abnormal time drive control means so that the movable accessory moves to an initial position that should exist when not operating. A gaming machine C2 comprising an accessory operation non-execution unit that makes it non-executable.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, after the drive means is controlled by the abnormal-time drive control means so that the abnormal condition is determined by the abnormal condition determination means and the movable accessory moves to the initial position that should exist when not operating, the drive means It is not executed by the accessory action non-execution means that the movable accessory is operated by. As a result, the movable combination that has become abnormal can be retained at the initial position without moving again from the initial position, so that the movable combination can be reliably prevented from interfering with the game. effective.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means In the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, a movable accessory provided in the game area; A driving unit for operating the movable combination; a determination unit for determining an operation mode of the movable combination based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit; and the determination Drive control means for controlling the drive means to operate the movable accessory based on the operation mode determined by the means, and control of the drive means by the drive control means. Calculating means for calculating a position; first detecting means for detecting that the movable accessory is present at the first position; and detecting that the movable accessory is present at the second position. When the second detecting means and the first detecting means detect that the movable accessory is present at the first position, the position of the movable accessory calculated by the calculating means is initialized. After the position of the movable accessory is initialized by the initialization means and the initialization means, the position of the movable accessory calculated by the calculation means based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means Is determined to be in the second position, and when the second detection means does not detect that the movable accessory is present in the second position, the abnormal state determination Characterized by comprising means Tricks machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the determination unit makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the dynamic display executing unit executes dynamic display of identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. Is done. Then, in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, a movable combination is provided in the game area, and based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit, the operation mode of the movable combination is determined by the determination unit, and the determined operation mode Based on the above, the drive means is controlled by the drive control means, and the movable accessory operates according to the operation mode. At this time, based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means, the position of the movable accessory is calculated by the calculation means. Here, when the movable accessory is present at the first position, this is detected by the first detection means, and when the movable accessory is present at the second position, this is detected by the second detection means. The Then, when it is detected by the first detection means that the movable combination is present at the first position, the position of the movable combination calculated by the calculation means is initialized by the initialization means, and then the drive control is performed. Based on the control of the drive means by the means, when it is determined that the position of the movable accessory calculated by the calculation means has become the second position, the movable accessory is present at the second position by the second detection means. If it is not detected that the abnormal state is detected, the abnormal state determination means determines that the state is abnormal. As described above, when the first detecting unit detects that the movable combination is present at the first position, the position of the movable combination calculated by the calculating unit is initialized by the initialization unit. The calculated position of the movable accessory is highly accurate. Despite the fact that the position of the movable accessory calculated with high accuracy is the second position, the second detection means must detect that the movable accessory is present at the second position. Therefore, since it is determined that it is in an abnormal state, it can be determined that the movable accessory is in an abnormal state with high accuracy. Therefore, since the recognition rate of the abnormal state of the movable accessory is bad or, conversely, it is possible to suppress the determination that the movable accessory is in the abnormal state even though it is not in the abnormal state. There is an effect that can be performed.

  In the gaming machine D1, when the abnormal state is determined by the abnormal state determination unit, the abnormal-time drive control unit controls the drive unit so that the movable accessory moves to an initial position that should exist when not operating. A gaming machine D2 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, when the abnormal state determination means determines that the abnormal state is present, the movable accessory moves to the initial position that should exist when not operating. Since the drive means is controlled by the abnormal-time drive control means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the movable accessory in an abnormal state from interfering with the game.

  In the gaming machine D2, after the driving means is controlled by the abnormal time drive control means so that the movable accessory moves to an initial position that should exist when not operating, the movable means operates by the driving means. A gaming machine D3, comprising: an accessory operation non-execution unit that does not execute the operation.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are produced. That is, after the drive means is controlled by the abnormal-time drive control means so that the abnormal condition is determined by the abnormal condition determination means and the movable accessory moves to the initial position that should exist when not operating, the drive means It is not executed by the accessory action non-execution means that the movable accessory is operated by. As a result, the movable combination that has become abnormal can be retained at the initial position without moving again from the initial position, so that the movable combination can be reliably prevented from interfering with the game. effective.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means In the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, a movable accessory provided in the game area; A driving means for operating the movable accessory, an operating means that can be operated by a player, and when the operation of the operating means is detected, the driving means is controlled to target the movable accessory A drive control means for controlling the drive means to move the movable accessory to an initial position that should be present during non-operation when the operation means is non-detected. By drive control means First calculating means for calculating the position of the movable accessory based on the control of the driving means, and based on the position of the movable accessory calculated by the first calculating means, the position of the movable accessory and the A second calculating unit that calculates an interval from a target position, and when the operation of the operating unit is detected, the drive control unit and the position of the movable accessory calculated by the second calculating unit A gaming machine E1, wherein the movable means is moved toward the target position by controlling the driving means based on an interval from the target position.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the determination unit makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the dynamic display executing unit executes dynamic display of identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. Is done. Then, in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, when a movable accessory is provided in the game area and an operation of an operation means that can be operated by the player is detected, a drive means for operating the movable accessory is controlled by the drive control means, When the movable accessory is moved toward the target position, and the operation of the operating means is not detected, the driving means is controlled to move the movable accessory toward the initial value that should exist when not operating. Here, based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means, the position of the movable accessory is calculated by the first calculation means. Further, based on the position of the movable combination calculated by the first calculation means, the interval between the position of the movable combination and the target position is calculated by the second calculation means. Then, when the operation of the operation means is detected, the drive means is controlled by the drive control means based on the interval between the position of the movable accessory calculated by the second calculation means and the target position, and the movable accessory becomes the target It is moved towards the position. In the conventional gaming machine, when the operation of the operation means is detected, the operation of the operation means is invalidated until the movement of the movable accessory corresponding to the operation is completed. When trying to make it move, it was necessary to wait for the movement of the movable accessory to be completed. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, when the operation of the operation means is detected, the drive control means drives the drive means based on the interval between the position of the movable accessory calculated by the second calculation means and the target position. Since the movable combination is moved toward the target position, the movable combination can be moved by accepting the operation of the operating means without waiting until the movement of the movable combination is completed. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operation means continuously, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be enhanced.

  Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means In the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, a movable accessory provided in the game area; A driving means for operating the movable combination; a determination section for determining an operation mode of the movable combination based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution section; and the movable section A first detecting means for detecting the presence of the accessory in the first position; a second detecting means for detecting that the movable accessory is in the second position; and the first Position or the second position Based on the position storage means for storing the position of the movable accessory as a point, the operation mode determined by the determination means, and the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage means Drive control means for controlling the means to operate the movable accessory, and the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage means with the first position as a reference point or the second position The reference point specifying means for specifying whether the reference point is determined according to the contents of the operation mode determined by the determining means, and the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is the first position. In this case, the position of the movable accessory is calculated using the first position as a reference point based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means, and the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is the first point. If it is set to position 2, Based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means, a calculation means for calculating the position of the movable accessory using the second position as a reference point and storing the position in the position storage means; and the reference point specifying means Is stored in the position storage means when the first detecting means detects that the movable accessory is present at the first position. If the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is the second position, the position of the movable accessory to be moved is initialized to the first position. Position initializing means for initializing the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage means to the second position when it is detected that an object is present at the second position. A featured gaming machine F1.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the determination unit makes a determination triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. Is done. Then, in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, a movable combination is provided in the game area, and the operation mode of the movable combination is determined by the determination unit based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution unit. Here, it is detected by the first detection means that the movable combination is present at the first position, and it is detected by the second detection means that the movable combination is present at the second position. The position storage means stores the position of the movable accessory with the first position or the second position as a reference point. And based on the operation | movement aspect determined by the determination means and the position of the movable accessory memorize | stored in the position memory | storage means, a drive means is controlled by a drive control means, and a movable accessory operates.

  The contents of the dynamic mode in which the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage means is determined by the determination means as to whether the first position is the reference point or the second position is the reference point. In accordance with the reference point specifying means, it is specified. When the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is the first position, the position of the movable accessory is calculated based on the control of the drive means by the drive control means with the first position as the reference point. When the reference point calculated by the reference point specifying unit is set to the second position, the position of the movable accessory is determined using the second position as the reference point based on the control of the driving unit by the drive control unit. Is calculated by the calculation means and stored in the position storage means. Further, when the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is set to the first position, the position storage means when the first detecting means detects that the movable accessory is present at the first position. When the position of the movable accessory stored in is initialized to the first position by the position initializing means and the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is set to the second position, the second detecting means When it is detected that the movable combination is present at the second position, the position of the movable combination stored in the position storage unit is initialized to the second position by the position initialization unit. As a result, when there are a plurality of detection means for detecting the position of the movable accessory, that is, the first detection means and the second detection means, there is only one position storage means for storing the position of the movable accessory. Even in this case, the reference point of the movable accessory position to be stored in the position storage means is specified in accordance with the contents of the operation mode determined by the determination means, and the position storage means is based on the specified reference point. The position of the movable accessory to be stored in is calculated, and the position is initialized. Therefore, when there are a plurality of detection means for detecting the position of the movable accessory, that is, the first detection means and the second detection means, and there is only one position storage means for storing the position of the movable accessory. Even so, there is an effect that the movement of the movable accessory can be controlled while accurately grasping the position of the movable accessory.

  A gaming machine G1, wherein in any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, C2, D1 to D3, E1, and F1, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, C2, D1 to D3, E1, and F1, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, C2, D1 to D3, E1, and F1, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 Frame button (operation means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
87 1st character (movable character)
87a First accessory vertical movement motor (drive means)
88 Origin detection sensor (initial position detection means, position detection means, first detection means)
89 Maximum point detection sensor (position detection means, second detection means)
222a Accessory drive data table storage area (storage means)
223q Current position memory (position storage means)
S1308 Fluctuation start processing (determination means)
S1813 (Initialization processing means)
S1908 Property editing / drive processing (drive control means)
S2208 (determination means, generation means)
S4023, S4024, S4029, S4030 (calculation means, first calculation means)
S2831 (Determination means)
S4001: No (non-execution means)
S4008, S4009 (end means)
S4010 (Initialization means)
S4014, S4015, S4018 (abnormal state determination means)
S4017 (Abnormal time drive means, accessory operation non-execution means)
S4044 (second calculation means)
S5003, S5005 (position initialization means)
S5007 to S5010 (calculation means)
S5011 (reference point specifying means)

Claims (1)

Dynamic display execution comprising: determination means for determining when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means,
Movable objects provided in the game area;
Driving means for operating the movable accessory;
Determining means for determining an operation mode of the movable accessory based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means;
First detection means for detecting that the movable accessory is present at the first position;
Second detection means for detecting that the movable accessory is present at the second position;
Position storage means for storing the position of the movable accessory using the first position or the second position as a reference point;
Drive control means for controlling the drive means to operate the movable combination based on the operation mode determined by the determination means and the position of the movable combination stored in the position storage means;
The operation mode in which the determining unit determines whether the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage unit is the first position or the second position as a reference point. A reference point specifying means for specifying according to the contents of
When the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is the first position, the movable accessory is set with the first position as a reference point based on the control of the driving means by the drive control means. If the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is the second position, the second position is determined based on the control of the driving means by the drive control means. Calculating means for calculating the position of the movable accessory as a point and storing it in the position storage means;
When the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is the first position, when the first detecting means detects that the movable accessory is present at the first position, If the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage means is initialized to the first position, and the reference point specified by the reference point specifying means is the second position, the second detection is performed. Position initialization means for initializing the position of the movable accessory stored in the position storage means to the second position when the means detects that the movable accessory is present at the second position. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images